Hands On With Sap S4hana and Gbi

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 208

DIRK-JAN SCHENK & CASPER DRAIJER

HANDS-ON WITH SAP


S/4HANA AND GBI

2
Hands-on with SAP S/4HANA and GBI
1st edition
© 2020 Dirk-Jan Schenk, Casper Draijer & bookboon.com
ISBN 978-87-403-3419-7

3
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Contents

CONTENTS
Preface 9

Introduction 10

Study Guide 12

PART 1: Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP 13

1 Enterprise Resource Planning 14


1.1 Enterprise Resource Planning Software 14
1.2 Enterprise Resource Planning as a Follow-Up to MRP 16
1.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of EPR 16
1.4 Functions of Enterprise Resource Planning 18
1.5 Supply Chain Management 21
1.6 Supply Chain Management and Enterprise Resource Planning 24

2 The Company: SAP AG 26


2.1 The Company: SAP AG 26
2.2 Products of SAP AG 26

3 SAP S/4HANA 28
3.1 Structure of SAP S/4HANA 28
3.2 Analytics 29
3.3 Financial 30
3.4 Human Capital Management 32
3.5 Procurement and Logistics Execution 33
3.6 Product Development and Manufacturing 33
3.7 Sales and Services 34
3.8 Corporate Services 35

4 Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA 36


4.1 Sorts of Data 36
4.2 Organization Structure Projected in SAP S/4HANA 37
4.3 Projecting the Business Structure in SAP S/4HANA 40
4.4 SAP Hierarchy 41
4.5 Financial (FI) 43
4.6 Material Management (MM) 44
4.7 Sales and Distribution (SD) 45

4
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Contents

5 Customizing 52
5.1 Scope of the Implementation 52
5.2 The Approach to the Project 53
5.3 Confusing Terminology 54
5.4 Customizing 54

6 Intelligent Enterprise 56
6.1 Intelligent Enterprise 56
6.2 Collaborative 58

7 GBI 60
7.1 Short Description of GBI 60

PART 2: C
 arrying out a Complete ERP Process 63

8 Log on and the SAP S/4HANA Interface 64

9 Accounts Receivable 65
9.1 Customer Balance 65
9.2 Custmoer Master Data 66

10 General Ledger Administration 75


10.1 General Ledger Account Master Data 75
10.2 Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement 76

11 Accounts Payable 78
11.1 Invoice Processing C-Business Diagram 78
11.2 Vendor Master Data 78
11.3 Post the Invoice 82
11.4 Monitoring the Accounts Payable 83
11.5 Payment to a Vendor 84

12 Human Resources 86
12.1 Position 86
12.2 Hiring a New Employee 88

13 Logistic Master Data 92


13.1 Master Data for the Materials 92
13.2 Bill of Material 103
13.3 Direct Wage Hours and Machine Hours 104
13.4 Work Center 107
13.5 Routing 108
13.6 Production Version 110
13.7 Info Record 111

5
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Contents

14 Complete ERP Process 112


14.1 General 112
14.2 C-Business Logistics Diagram 112
14.3 Create a Quotation for a Customer 113
14.4 Create a Customer Order 114
14.5 The Stock/Requirements List 115
14.6 Requirements Planning (MRP)> 116
14.7 Create a Purchase Order for the Supplier 118
14.8 Goods Receipt from a Supplier 119
14.9 Transfer Order Goods Receipt to Permanent Storage 120
14.10 Receipt of the Invoice from the Supplier 122
14.11 Payment of the Supplier’s Invoice 123
14.12 Production Order 124
14.13 Inssue of Raw Materials to Production 125
14.14 Transfer Raw Materials to Production 125
14.15 Confirmation of a Production Order 127
14.16 Goods Receipt Finished Product from Production 127
14.17 Creating a Delivery to the Customer 128
14.18 The Document Flow Around the Sales Order 129
14.19 Picking the Delivery 129
14.20 Goods Issue Delivery to the Customer 130
14.21 Invoice the Customer 131
14.22 Incoming Payment from the Customer 132
14.23 Tracking and Tracing 133

Part 3: Special Applications 136

15 Fixed Assets 137


15.1 C Business Diagram Acquisition of Fixed Assets Scenario 137
15.2 Create Fixed Asset 137
15.3 Registering the Purchase 138
15.4 Payment of the Supplier’s Invoice 140
15.5 360 View on Asset 140
15.6 Depreciation 141

16 Repair Order 144


16.1 C-Business Diagram Internal Order Processing 144
16.2 Equipment Master Data 145
16.3 Create Malfunction Report 146
16.4 Info Record 148
16.5 Create Maintenance Order 149

6
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Contents

16.6 Release Maintenance Order 151


16.7 Ordering Materials for Internal Use 152
16.8 Goods Receipt from a Supplier 153
16.9 Receipt of the Invoice from the Supplier 153
16.10 Payment of the Supplier’s Invoice 155
16.11 Overall Completion Confirmation 155
16.12 Analyse Cost and Technical Completion 156
16.13 Settlement of Costs of the Maintenance Order 157
16.14 Analyse the Costs Business Completion 158
16.15 Display Order History 159

17 Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning 161


17.1 Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning 161
17.2 Master Data Change and Extension 162
17.3 Product Group 163
17.4 Demand Management 164
17.5 Forecast Based Planning 165
17.6 Production Planning 167
17.7 Create a Purchase Order for the Supplier 168
17.8 Goods Receipt from a Supplier 169
17.9 Transfer Order Goods Receipt to Permanent Storage 170
17.10 Receipt of the Invoice from the Supplier 172
17.11 Payment of the Supplier’s Invoice 174
17.12 Production Order 174
17.13 Issue of Raw Materials to Production 176
17.14 Transfer Raw Materials to Production 176
17.15 Confirmation of a Production Order 178
17.16 Goods Receipt Finished Product from Production 178
17.17 Sales from Stock 179
17.18 Creating a Delivery to the Customer 180
17.19 The Document Flow Around the Sales Order 180
17.20 Picking the Delivery 181
17.21 Goods Issue Delivery to the Customer 182
17.22 Invoice the Customer 182
17.23 Incoming Payment from the Customer 184
17.24 Analyses 185

18 Product Costing 186


18.1 Cost of Goods Manufactured 186
18.2 Change Master Data and BOM 188
18.3 Cost of Goods with Overhead 189

7
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Contents

18.4 Stock Valuation at Costs of Goods Manufactured 189


18.5 Production Order Using Product Costing 192
18.6 Requirements Planning (MRP) 193
18.7 Create a Purchase Order for the Supplier 194
18.8 Goods Receipt from a Supplier 195
18.9 Transfer Order Goods Receipt to Permanent Storage 196
18.10 Receipt of the Invoice from the Supplier 199
18.11 Payment of the Supplier’s Invoice 200
18.12 Production Order Release 201
18.13 Issue of Raw Materials to Production 201
18.14 Transfer Raw Materials to Production 202
18.15 Confirmation of a Production Order 203
18.16 Goods Receipt Finished Product from Production 204
18.17 Planned and Actual Costs Production Order 205
18.18 Actual Overhead 206
18.19 Variance Analysis Production 206
18.20 Settlement of Production Order 207
18.21 Overview of Planned and Actual Cost Production Order 208

8
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Preface

PREFACE
The material for this module was originally based on the exercises with the Vulcan project
of the University of Würzburg and scenarios as described for SAP’s model business IDES.

In June 2000 an upgrade took place of the SAP ERP system and of the course book
accompanying the 4.6b version of SAP ERP.

Spring 2013 a lot chapters have been improved, like human resource management and the
more detailed calculation of production costs. We thank Jan van der Belt, VU University,
and Colm O’Flynn, HvA. Special thanks go to Arnold Caris as co-author of the previous
editions.

Spring 2020 the exercises were converted to S/4HANA, the Fiori interface and the GBI
dataset. The standard S/4 GBI environment is little customized to fit the needs for the
exercises in this book.

We greatly appreciate the cooperation and contribution of Sandra de Hoog.

Amsterdam, 12 June 2020

Dirk-Jan Schenk
Casper Draijer

9
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Introduction
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Introduction

INTRODUCTION
Information within large companies (multinationals) is usually extracted from separate
registration systems which support specific business functions such as production planning,
warehousing, financial accounting and personnel administration.

Many companies wish to integrate their business processes. Process integration reflects
the change from a functional organization towards a process oriented organization. The
integration is not only within the company, but also beyond the borders of the organization.
The external process integration with customers and vendors uses Customer Relationship
Management and Supplier Relationship Management. The cooperation with other companies
is done with Supply Chain Management and Product Lifecycle Management.

Enterprize Resource Planning (ERP) integrates logistics, financial and human resources in
one system. (See Figure A)

Figure A ERP system and disciplines

SAP S/4HANA is an ERP software system developed by the SAP AG that covers almost
all transaction requirements and business functions of a company.

Global Bike International (GBI), has been developed by SAP University Alliances and the
SAP UCC’s (University Competence Centers).

This course is an introduction to the ERP system S/4HANA with the GBI dataset.

The method has been developed for use in business schools and universities. Knowledge of
the subjects related to ERP is assumed.

The method is not focusing on the different modules of SAP S/4HANA, but on the main
characteristic of ERP: the integration of business processes.

11
10
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Introduction

The course is divided into three parts:


Part 1 Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP.
Part 2 Carrying out a complete ERP process.
Part 3 Special applications.

Part one, Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP, deals with Enterprise Resource Planning
and the company, SAP AG, which developed the SAP systems. The technical aspects of the
SAP S/4HANA system are illustrated and a description of SAP is given.

Part two focuses on a complete ERP process. The assignments in the chapters deal with
logistics, financial and human resources. Each chapter starts with a short introduction and
a process outline.

In chapter 14 a sales order-driven process is presented. By means of material requirements


planning (MRP I) all steps of the business cycle are carried out and are offering experiences
typical for working with SAP S/4HANA. The data of chapters 9-13 are applied in this ERP
process.

In part three, special applications such as fixed assets, maintenance / controlling, production
on stock with forecast based planning and product costing are introduced.

11
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Study Guide

STUDY GUIDE
Indication of hours needed by students to carry out the assignments:

Chapters 9, 10, 11, 12, 13: 1.5 hours per chapter.


Chapter 14: 8 hours.

A next level for Finance is in the chapters 15, 16 and 18.


More about Logistics can be found in chapter 17.

The description of the assignments and carrying them out give answers to all kind of
questions regarding the use of an ERP system. For example: How can a product be
created? How is a purchase order executed and which financial documents are created?
How is a production order created and when will the finished product be delivered? How
is a warehouse organized? How are orders delivered to customers? Which master data are
necessary to perform an MRP run?

The relevance of the exercises for the different subjects and competences are summarized
in Figure A.

The assignments in this book are presented concisely in such a way as to allow this course to
be integrated into courses based on various didactical insights: from self-study to theoretical
lectures and guided completion of the exercises.

12
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP

PART 1: E
 NTERPRISE RESOURCE
PLANNING AND SAP
1. Enterprise Resource Planning
2. The Company: SAP AG
3. SAP S/4HANA
4. Organization depicted in SAP S/4HANA
5. Customizing
6. Intelligent Enterprise
7. GBI

In part one, Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP, chapter 1 contains a description of
enterprise resource planning in general.

The company that developed SAP S/4HANA, SAP AG, will be introduced in chapter 2.
In chapter 3 an overview of the functionality of SAP S/4HANA is given.

The depiction of the organization of a company in the system will be explained in chapter 4.
This and other adaptations of SAP S/4HANA to the company can be found at customizing,
which can be found in chapter 5.

Chapter 6 deals with the SAP Intelligent Enterprise. The GBI environment is described in
chapter 7.

13
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

1 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE
PLANNING
Enterprise Resource Planning software will be explained in this chapter. Attention is given
to the advantages and disadvantages of ERP software. Enterprise Resource Planning can be
considered as follow-up development coming out of Material Resource Planning.

The functions of Enterprise Resource Planning are presented in a diagram and are explained
in the text. The flow of goods and the transformations they may undergo are explained
in paragraph 1.4. In paragraph 1.6 the flow of goods is linked with Enterprise Resource
Planning.

1.1 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING SOFTWARE


Enterprise Resource Planning software (ERP software) can be defined as software supporting
the whole range of operations by processing the information associated with goods flows
and financial flows.

ERP software above all has an important added value since it facilitates integrated recording of
information throughout the organization. The information kept on record by an organization
is similar for most companies and can easily be accommodated within a standard package.

In the past, each department installed its own computer system. The personnel department
used a personnel management system, the financial administration an accounting package,
while several planning and warehouse systems were in use in the production department.
The separate systems often worked to the complete satisfaction of departmental users, but
the links between these systems led to many problems, high cost levels and poor flexibility.
An integrated ERP package offers a solution to this problem.

14
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

Figure 1.1 Enterprise Resource Planning in SAP S/4HANA

A large production company will be able in general to get by with a system for office
automation (e.g. MSOffice), an ERP package (for example SAP S/4HANA) and some highly
specialized software in the field of process automation
1155 (for example CAD/CAM systems).

The development of ERP software is a booming business. The wealth of advertisements and
job recruitment sites like www.monsterboard.nl in publications specializing in computer and
information specialist recruitment indicates a great demand for SAP consultants, Oracle
experts, etc.

SAP (SAP S/4HANA, SAP ERP and SAP R/3) was in 2018 with a market share of 22%
still the market leader. Oracle, who took over Peoplesoft and JD Edwards, is number two.

ERP systems attempt to offer a fully integrated solution for the management of financial
flows, goods flows and information flows within organizations. Many ERP systems have their
roots in production planning. This is sometimes apparent from the fact that the production
module is significantly better developed than the other modules. The original nature of the
production (discrete vs. process industry) often has a distinct impact over contemporary
software. SAP originally started as software for finance and controlling and has consequently
developed functionality features centered on production, logistics and HR. Nearly all the
large players in the market are converging with respect to functionality of the ERP package.
Meanwhile SAP has process modules designed to support the process industry.

15
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

1.2 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING


AS A FOLLOW-UP TO MRP
ERP is also seen as a supplement to MRP II. In the Material Requirements Planning concept
(MRP I) a demand forecast is drawn up on the basis of bills of materials, calculated according
to range of production orders and purchasing orders expected. Manufacturing Resource
Planning (MRP II) was a later extension. This concept represents an expansion of MRP I
into a more integrated planning and management concept. MRP II for instance also takes
into account the available production capacities. MRP I and MRP II are compatible for
use within a single organization. Increasingly far-reaching internationalization means that
management must take place ‘over the heads of individual plants’. Mutual deliveries between
organizational units are included in the concept, for instance. ERP is compatible with this.
The functionality of ERP software has been drastically expanded over recent years to include
Customer Relation Management (CRM), sales support, Supply Chain Management (SCM),
workflow management (WFM), Human Resources Management (HRM), etc. This trend
continues; ERP software is further expanding its borders. Nearly all operational functions
are now supported.

1.3 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF EPR


Some of the advantages have already been discussed above. The most important of these are:

• Integration: the coherence between processes is seamlessly supported. Island


automation is no longer an issue. Integration reduces problems caused by
redundancy and errors in the data.
• Process orientation: instead of supporting activities in departments, ERP orientates
itself towards operational processes that take place throughout the whole of the
organization (and outside it), and indeed you see this in so-called Workflow
Management solutions that the ERP systems offer. These cater to the support
and direction of operational processes.
• Openness: ERP systems can communicate with other systems; this means that
the Supply Chain concept, a far-reaching chain integration into the industrial
process, can be utilized. ERP systems can also communicate with other systems,
such as Customer Relationship Management software (CRM).
• State-of-the-art: the research being carried out by ERP suppliers is sufficiently
comprehensive to ensure that a company using an ERP system can be confident
that the functionality will both continue to be available and continue to
be expanded. Associations of users often have some influence on aspects of
functionality earmarked for expansion or improvement.

16
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

• Industrial sector orientation: ERP suppliers ensure that their software supports
various sectors of industry. This support (called Industry Solutions) is constantly
being expanded.
• Internationalization: ERP can be used supra-locational, supra-organizational and
beyond national borders. This is an ideal solution for multinationals, since data
taken from all their subsidiaries needs to be consolidated.

ERP is not a universal panacea. Naturally there are some disadvantages to the introduction
of a system such as this. You might like to consider the following, for instance:

• High costs: the price of the software license is fairly high. The consultancy costs
involved in the implementation of an ERP package exceed the license cost
by a factor of approximately 2–4. A Dutch theme park, for instance, recently
implemented an ERP system at a cost of about €3.5 million, of which €0.5
million was for the software license.
• Lengthy implementation: the time taken for making enhancements, customizing
and the implementation often exceeds a year. Accelerated implementation
techniques, Accelerated SAP, are available however, under which a selection
is made of best practices in the implementation, where the need for labour-
intensive fine tuning of the software is partly eliminated. In this case processes
in the organization (as regards its operational processes) are adapted to the
software. A solution like this is welcomed particularly by smaller organizations.
In the case of medium and small companies, an implementation of this kind
takes something in the order of 3 to 6 months, depending on the complexity
involved.
• No tailor-made solution: ERP remains a standard solution: the user may have
to modify his expectations as far as his package of requirements is concerned.
Tailor-made systems are generally much more expensive than standard software.
Modifications made to standard software are costly and can cause problems with
upgrades. For that reason it becomes the policy of some companies to avoid
modifications during the implementation.

Since the 1990s we have seen more organizations transferring to standard software. On the
one hand, each company is individually aware of its own unique operational processes, yet
these unique points are often remnants from the past. There is something to be said for
taking a look to see whether the best practice options, which ERP systems offer, are not
in fact better than one’s own solutions. Why should my organization differ from the many
other companies in my sector that have already been studied? Moreover, are my (unique)
deviations from the general pattern as regards operational processes really as necessary as I
think they are?

17
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

The employee learning period for new functionality in an ERP package is, as a matter of
fact, generally much shorter than in cases where a totally new software package is acquired.

1.4 FUNCTIONS OF ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING


Figure 1.2 shows the most important functions that can be used by an ERP system in
corporate operations. In this overview, the supporting functions are grouped around the
logistics, the primary processes. The central feature is the flow of goods from the supplier
to the customer: procurement results in the receipt and storage of raw materials (triangle),
the various raw materials are processed during production into finished product units;
these are subsequently delivered to the customer from stock. The way in which content is
given to the primary processes of procurement, sales, stock control, shop floor control and
manufacturing, is market and product specific. The flow of goods from the supplier to the
customer is counterbalanced by a cash flow in the opposite direction: from the customer
to the supplier. Recording of this cash flow takes place in the accounts receivable (AR) and
accounts payable (AP) sub-administrations and in the ledger administration (general ledger).

Figure 1.2 Enterprise Resource Planning

The relationship between the flow of goods and the cash flow constitutes the value cycle
of an organization. The non-shaded functions form the secondary, supporting activities.
Treasury, asset management and consolidation support the management and planning of
18
financial resources over the short and long term. Workflow management, planning and
control, human resources, service management and customer relations management support
the logistics processes.

18
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

In Figure 1.3 the central focus is on the flow of goods. The planning levels and logistic
modules are shown.

Figure 1.3 Integrated planning

In sales and distribution (SD) the sales statistics for the previous year form the basis for
establishing a sales forecast for the coming year. This sales forecast makes up the demand
for production capacity. By gearing the availability of capacity to sales demand, provision is
made for the necessary capacity within the production planning (PP) by establishing both
the nominative capacity and the expected annual capacity (year capacity plan and capacity
allocation). The planning of the annual capacity constitutes the basis for establishing the
main production plan within PP, as well as the basis for setting up the necessary procurement
within Materials Management (MM). The master production plan has a planning horizon
of one year and consists of production objectives relating to product units per period.
The master production plan thereby creates a procurement requirement for raw materials/
components. This requirement is met by establishing a procurement plan. The master
production plan is converted into a detailed production plan, with a planning horizon of
less than one year. The planning quantities are the number of units to be produced and the
number of production orders. Even at this level, sales figures are coordinated according to
production objectives and procurement. The planned production orders are converted into
actual production orders, raw materials/components are issued and processed into finished
products. The finished products are made available for delivery to the customer by MM.
The planning for distribution to customers, which is also factored into this, takes place
from within sales and distribution, SD.
25

19
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 1 Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 1 Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP

Figure 1.4 Integrated processes

Integrated planning comes with integrated processes cross departments as depicted in figure
1.4. In SAP you can define roles to organize the authorization and to assign groups of
applications in the launchpad, part of the SAP user interface.

Figure 1.5 Role Financial accounting in the SAP Launchpad

20
26
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

1.5 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT


The Supply Chain concept is central in SAP S/4HANA: the chain from the original supplier
to the final consumer has to be managed. By bringing optimum co-ordination to the flow of
information, the flow of goods and the cash flow, a maximum customer response is achieved
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 1 Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP
at minimum cost according to SAP. It is possible for a customer, to gain information from
the Internet regarding the products of a particular company, to adapt your own products
accordingly and to place an order. This order then automatically ends up in SAP S/4HANA;
where necessary, this package automatically generates orders to suppliers (multi-company
planning) and even initiates the necessary processes within the organization of a company.
In this way, open systems can be linked to each other and transactions extended over various
individual companies.

The Supply Chain comprises all activities that have to do with the flow of goods and the
transformations they may undergo, all the way from raw materials through to the end user,
complete with the associated information flows (see Figure 1.6).

Figure 1.6 Chain from supplier to consumer

We are concerned here in fact with the activities that take place within the manufacturing
process. In the case of simple products, this supply chain can readily be identified and
surveyed, but when you think of the automobile industry, for instance, the situation is
more complex.

Supply Chain Management (SCM) is therefore the control and integration of these activities
by making use of all kinds of cross connections and networks in order to achieve a significant
competitive advantage. The chain goes upstream in a supplier network and downstream in a
distribution network (customers). The supplier network consists of all the companies that
provide an input in any way whatsoever; these inputs could be physical raw materials,
but they could also be information, for instance. In the case of the automobile industry,
this chain would represent a supplier network of thousands of companies supplying goods
ranging from steel and plastics, but also including complete gearboxes, brake systems, car
radios and similar. Even the production of these gearboxes etc. is part of the supply chain.

21
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

Some authors say that when looking for the start of a supply chain you always come back
to Mother Earth. The main point, however, is that each supply chain consists of a (generally
large) series of linked suppliers and customers; each customer becomes a supplier in the
next link of the supply chain until the product reaches the end user.

Seen from within an individual company, you can say that the three SCM perspectives are:

1. internal functions (transforming inputs into outputs);


2. upstream supplier functions;
3. downstream customer functions.

The management challenge is that coordination takes place between these three aspects in
such a way that the company maintains its right to exist within the supply chain.

1. Internal functions
Where the internal functions are concerned, these relate to various operational
processes, including the transformation processes of raw materials or semi
manufactures into finished products. These raw materials or semi-manufactures
are supplied by the suppliers and the finished products are supplied to the
distribution channel (the dealer organization in the case of the automobile
industry). Orders from purchasers of automobiles must be translated into
production orders. It is easy to imagine for instance that in the case of large
freight lorries (as with DAF), this takes place on a one-to-one basis. Each
customer order = one production order = one freight lorry. Even with private
vehicles, things are beginning to move in the direction of production on
demand. On deciding to purchase a new car, for instance, you can now specify
the version, the color and whether it should have air-conditioning, etc. The
influence of the final consumer over the production is steadily increasing.

The sales order data are very detailed: quotation prices, latest possible delivery
dates, delivery scenarios, etc. Production planning is also extremely important.
Use can be made of MRP here.

2. Upstream supplier functions


This refers to functions that take place outside the individual organization.
Upstream is the procurement function. You think here of the selection of
suppliers who can meet our requirements and wishes and who are reliable
when it comes to delivery. The maintenance of good relations with suppliers
is extremely important. In SCM, you see contacts with suppliers fanning out
into the product development, commercial office, warehouse and administration
departments and so on.

22
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

In this situation, there is close contact with the suppliers from within the
internal operational processes.

3. Downstream customer functions


These functions comprise all distribution channels and processes used in
facilitating the flow of products to the final customer. In most cases, it involves
matters such as storage, transport, and sales activities.

SCM is orientated towards the control between various components in the


supply chain. Five levels of integration are identified within SCM:

1. standardization of master financial data;


2. standardization of master logistics data;
3. exchange of time-dependent data;
4. WITH
HANDS-ON standardization
SAP ERP ANDof planning and control
IDES Part 1procedures;
Enterprise Resource Planning and SAP
5. supply chain planning.

The fifth level can only be reached after the preceding levels have been completed.

Supply Chain Management can (and also will) lead to a curtailment of the number of links
in the industrial column. This is clarified in figure 1.7.

Figure 1.7 Supply chain planning

It is naturally the business of a particular company to ensure that it is not pushed out of
the supply chain.

23
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

1.6 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT AND


ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING
Supply Chain Management has primarily to do with the building up and maintenance of
close ties with suppliers and customers. You see that this is made possible by developments
in ICT. SCM is therefore both relationship- based and technology-driven, to use a few words
of ‘newspeak’. A combination of ERP and Internet (E-Business/E-Commerce) provides
many options for the successful use of SCM. The advent of these technologies even makes a
worldwide supply chain possible. As an example you can take the DOW Chemical Company,
an industrial undertaking with branches in 168 countries and an annual turnover of more
than $50 billion in something like 3,100 products in the chemicals, plastics and agricultural
sectors. The company employs 45,000 people and has 150 production locations in 35
countries. The most important aspect of SCM for DOW is that the company tries to offer
consumers what they want at an acceptable cost (an acceptable price). The company has a
Supply Chain Technology Center (based at Terneuzen in the Netherlands and at other locations
worldwide) that will be responsible for cross-pollination between best practices and new
technologies. The Center also scans for best practices and new technologies which DOW
can also make use of. The deployment of ERP and a strong focus on operational processes
is an important outcome of the Center’s activities.

Modern ERP systems integrate the planning, control and monitoring of processes within
an organization. Because the internal flow of information between important departments
within a company is integrally coordinated by ERP, it is possible to bring products to the
market quicker, reduce costs and guarantee the loyalty of customers and suppliers. Using the
right ERP system, a company can expand its ability to monitor its activities to the whole
of the supply chain. The initiative of SAP in relation to Supply Chain Management (SAP
SCM), for instance, covers all aspects of supply chain integration.

SCM solutions are on hand within SAP in the form of APO, Advanced Planner and
Optimizer, and LES, Logistics Execution System. APO is responsible for improved demand
forecasting and increased efficiency in production processes. LES facilitates more efficient,
rapid and accurate flow of goods in the supply chain.

24
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Enterprise Resource Planning

Figure 1.8 Supply chain planning

30

25
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI The Company: SAP AG

2 THE COMPANY: SAP AG


In this chapter the company that developed SAP S/4HANA and SAP is introduced and
the products made by SAP AG are mentioned.

2.1 THE COMPANY: SAP AG


SAP AG is market leader in the area of inter-enterprise solutions whereby the internal processes
and processes between companies and their vendors, customers and partners integrate.

The revenue of SAP AG was more than €27,55 billion in 2019. SAP employed more than
98,000 people in 2019.

SAP stands for Systems, Applications and Products. Some of SAP’s clients are Bayer, Honda,
Audi, KLM Air France, Nokia, Nestlé, Deutsche Bank, Siemens, Heineken, Quaker, Shell,
Microsoft, Akzo Nobel, Rabobank, DSM, Mars and Dijklander Ziekenhuis.

2.2 PRODUCTS OF SAP AG


SAP S/4HANA is the successor of SAP R/3 and is an important step forwards, because this
is the first service-oriented business application based on SAP Net Weaver. SAP S/4HANA
can be used on-premise (own installation) or cloud (installation and maintenance by SAP).

SAP HANA (High-Performance Analytic Appliance) software is based on a in-memory


database, is able to process huge amounts of data in real-time in the central memory.
Complex queries on over 450 billion records can be performed in seconds. The processing
of these 450 billion records used less than 3 Terabyte of physical memory. This database
will be placed under SAP S/4HANA. Reports can be up to 9,000 times faster with HANA
than with a conventional relational database.

SAP Fiori and Screen Personas to personalize and simplify the user experience (UX) for
your SAP applications. Using modern UX design principles, SAP Fiori delivers a role-based,
consumer-grade user experience across all lines of business, tasks, and devices. Use SAP
Fiori apps, or take advantage of solutions that natively incorporate the UX – such as SAP
S/4HANA and SAP C/4HANA (CRM systems).

26
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI The Company: SAP AG

SAP S/4HANA is the next generation ERP. The database HANA and the interface will be
Fiori.

Midsized companies will be using the SAP S/4 or Business ByDesign.

For companies, which demand an extended functionality in a flexible and scalable application,
these applications are an excellent solution.

Business ByDesign is a cloud solution from SAP, a complete on demand ERP system for
midsized companies. The customer pays a fixed fee per user.

For smaller companies the SAP Business One application has been developed.

For customers, who want a simple but strong application which supplies support of their
most important processes, Business One is the solution. This relative cheap, fully integrated
software gives companies access to the information, application and services which are needed
to enlarge their revenues, to control the costs and to stimulate their growth. SAP Business
One integrates easily with other systems such as SAP Business Suite.

There is more information about SAP on www.sap.com. In the Netherlands there is an


active users association, the VNSG (Dutch SAP user group). There is more information
about the VNSG on www.vnsg.nl.

27
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI SAP S/4HANA

3 SAP S/4HANA
In this chapter the structure of SAP S/4HANA is explained and extensive attention is paid
to the various solutions of the SAP S/4HANA system.

3.1 STRUCTURE OF SAP S/4HANA


SAP S/4HANA delivers functionality for business analytics, financials, human capital
management, business performance and business services. Above that it gives support on
the area of system management such as users maintenance, configuration maintenance and
management of user experience and web-services.

SAP S/4HANA includes four individual solutions that support key functional areas, which
together form the foundation for the business processes:

• SAP S/4HANA Financials (Finance and Controlling)


• SAP Human Capital Management (HCM)
• SAP S/4HANA Operations:
- Procurement and Logistics Execution (Material Management, Warehouse
Management)
- Projects and Manufacturing (Project System, Production Planning)
• SAP S/4HANA Corporate Services:
- Sales and Service (Sales and Distribution, Corporate Services)
- Corporate Services (Enterprise Asset Management)

The different possibilities of SAP will be explained with the help of the Solution Map in
figure 3.1.

28
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI SAP S/4HANA

Buy
Track
(MM)
(CO)

Sell People
(SD) (HCM)

Make Maintain
(PP) (EAM)
Store
Track
(WM)
(FI)
Projekt
Services
(PS)
(CS)

Figure 3.1 Solution Map

34

3.2 ANALYTICS
SAP Analytics Cloud (SAC) will be the analytic tool for all SAP systems. It can connect to
HANA databases. Dashboards and predictive scenarios can be created with SAC. Dashboard
are used for commercial and financial graphic overviews. An other good example of predictive
analytics can be found in Enterprise Asset Management (EAM), companies do not like to
do unnecessary maintenance and on the other hand do not like unexpected downtime of
machines.

29
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI SAP S/4HANA

Figure 3.2 Analytics

3.3 FINANCIAL
SAP S/4HANA Financials provides a complete financial management solution for a broad
range of industries. The solution offers depth of functionality in accounting, reporting,
analysis, financial supply chain, corporate governance and treasury management. In the new
concept within SAP S/4HANA is profit center accounting, determination of the costs of
goods sold, special valuation accounts and consolidation accounts integrated. This integration
supports the need for the multi-dimensional valuation and reports from various points of
view, such as the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) international versus local,
Sarbanes-Oxley compliance (SOX) and supports the reporting according to International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). The solution gives depth of the functionality in
accounting, reporting, analyses, financial supply
35 chain and treasury management. Financial
and management reporting plus internal controls and documentation make possible a good
level of business analytics.

30
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI SAP S/4HANA

Figure 3.3 describes the various possibilities of the financials.

Figure 3.3 Financials

Universal journal
The database for S/4HANA is simplified compared with SAP ERP. This is more than a
technicalWITH
HANDS-ON change. TheAND
SAP S/4 complete
GBI integration of Finance and controlling is realizedSAP
in S/4.
ERP

36

For the input of data this means, every GL-account is a Cost Element and all financial
postings are posted on a Cost Center. Every financial transaction is recorded in the Universal
Journal, this is one table with all fields that might be touched (in ERP we saw separate
documents for GL, costing, profit center, etc.).

31
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI SAP S/4HANA

Reporting is easier, because as a user you can easily create any crosslink analysis between
different areas, e.g. cost center postings and profit centers.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI SAP


ERP
3.4 HUMAN CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
To meet the demands of today’s knowledge-based economy, companies must maximize the
potential and productivity of their employees. Maximizing the investment in the organization’s
human capital is crucial to business success. 3This
7
requires transforming the HR function from
an administration department into a strategic contributor of human capital management
strategies. Modern HR departments must deliver a contribution to improve the efficiency
and productivity of the employees.

The HCM functions are partly available in S/4HANA and partly in the SAP cloud solution
SuccessFactors.

Figure 3.4 describes the possibilities of the various forms of Human Capital Management.

Figure 3.4 Human Capital Management

32
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI SAP S/4HANA

3.5 PROCUREMENT AND LOGISTICS EXECUTION


With SAP S/4HANA Operations, you can manage end-to-end logistics for complete business
cycles, such as warehouse management. The procurement will be accomplished in collaboration
with the vendor. There are different ways to co-operate with the vendor (collaboration).
It is very important to manage the flow of goods very well inside the company (inbound
logistics), but also those outside the company (outbound logistics).

Figure 3.5 describes the possibilities of the various forms of the Procurement and Logistics
Execution.

Figure 3.5 Procurement and Logistics Execution

3.6 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND MANUFACTURING


38

With this application it is possible to manage engineering and design, create relevant product
data, and plan and execute your manufacturing operations.

This solution enables connectivity to shop floor systems with special quality requirements.
With help from Life-Cycle Data Management you can manage production processes, bill
of materials, routings, recipes, etc.

Figure 3.6 describes the possibilities of the various forms of Product Development and
Manufacturing.

33
This solution enables connectivity to shop floor systems with special quality requirements.
With
With this
helpapplication it is possible
from Life-Cycle to manage engineering
Data Management and design,
you can manage create processes,
production relevant product
bill of
data, and plan and execute your
materials, routings, recipes, etc. manufacturing operations.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI SAP S/4HANA


This
Figuresolution enables the
3.6 describes connectivity to shop
possibilities of thefloor systems
various with
forms of special
Productquality requirements.
Development and
With help from Life-Cycle Data Management you can manage production processes, bill of
Manufacturing.
materials, routings, recipes, etc.

Figure 3.6 describes the possibilities of the various forms of Product Development and
Manufacturing.

Figure 3.6
Figure 3.6Product
ProductDevelopment and and
Development Manufacturing
Manufacturing

3.7 SALES AND SERVICE


Figure 3.6 Product Development and Manufacturing
Sales and Service supports a broad scale of activities from presales and sales until after sales.
3.7 order processes
The SALES can AND be SERVICES
managed. The after sales and service elements provide for good
customer
3.7 relations,
SALES
Sales and AND
Service through
SERVICE
supports a customer
broad scalerelationship management.
of activities from presalesTheandcomplete sales
sales until can
after be
sales.
managed
The order professionally.
processes can bea managed.
Sales and Service supports broad scaleThe of after salesfrom
activities and presales
service elements
and salesprovide for sales.
until after good
customer
The order relations, through
processesthe customerThe
canpossibilities
be managed. relationship management.
after sales andofservice The complete
elements providesales
forcan be
good
Figure 3.7 describes of the various forms Sales and Service.
managed relations,
customer professionally.
through customer relationship management. The complete sales can be
managed professionally.
Figure 3.7 describes the possibilities of the various forms of Sales and Service.
Figure 3.7 describes the possibilities of the various forms of Sales and Service.

Figure 3.7 Sales and Service

Figure 3.7
Figure 3.7Sales
Salesand Service
and Service

35
34

35
34

34
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI SAP S/4HANA

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI SAP ERP


3.8 CORPORATE SERVICES
SAP S/4HANA Corporate Services supports and streamlines the administrative processes
3.8 CORPORATE SERVICES
that are standard to most businesses. Those business-critical support processes must happen
SAP
with S/4HANA
maximum Corporate Services
efficiency and supports and streamlines the administrative processes that
control.
are standard to most businesses. Those business-critical support processes must happen with
maximum efficiency and control.
The following areas can be managed with Corporate Services:
The following areas can be managed with Corporate Services:
• Real-estate management.
•• Real-estate
Enterprise Asset Management etc.
management.
• Enterprise Asset Management etc.
Figure 3.8 describes the possibilities of the various forms of corporate services.
Figure 3.8 describes the possibilities of the various forms of corporate services.

Figure 3.8
Figure 3.8Corporate
CorporateServices
Services

35
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA

4 ORGANIZATION DEPICTED
IN SAP S/4HANA
There are a number of concepts that form the basic framework of SAP. These concepts, like
the corporate structure, are important. All the information within the system is grouped
according to this structure. The concepts are explained in this chapter.

The sorts of data in SAP are distinguished first. Next the organizational structure used in SAP
S/4HANA is described, and the hierarchy that functions as a backbone in SAP S/4HANA
is illustrated. You will use entity relation diagrams (ERD) to depict the relations and links
between the different concepts.

4.1 SORTS OF DATA


You can distinguish two sorts of data, namely transaction data and master data.

Transaction data
Transaction data register the daily business transactions. Think in terms of regular sales
orders, purchase orders, invoices, production orders and suchlike. SAP gives every document
pertaining to a transaction a document number. With transaction data, there are usually a
number of related documents, which together register a particular process. A sales process
may, for example, involve a quotation, followed by an order, a delivery and a payment.

Master data
Master data are relatively fixed data within a system. In SAP S/4HANA client files, staff
files, material files, routings and account schemes are examples of master data. Master
data usually have different aspects; these are called views or infotypes. A material always
has master data, but storage and accounting data about a particular material can also be
stored. You then add views to the material. A member of staff has an address, but also a
particular salary and maybe family members. In SAP, these are called infotypes included in
employee master data.

36
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA

Business Partner
Any person or organization that has a relation to the company is called a business partner.
The ‘General’ data, for example name and address, are only related to the partner.

The business partner can be assigned to various roles and those roles can be related to
organizational units within the company (see next paragraph). Examples:

Role Unit

Customer Sales organization

FI Customer (Debtor) Company

Vendor Purchase organization

FI Vendor (Creditor) Company

Employee Personnel organization

Several roles can be assigned to one business partner: a company can be both a customer
and a vendor; a person can be employee, creditor and customer; etc.

4.2 ORGANIZATION STRUCTURE PROJECTED IN SAP S/4HANA


By defining clients, the administration of several concerns can be conducted within one
installation of SAP. With clients, a distinction can be made between the actual business and
test or practice businesses that are used to test a new module or to train the work force.
By constructing a ‘practice client’, members of staff can practice with the business data to
their hearts’ content without influencing the actual business operation.

37
By defining clients, the administration of several concerns can be conducted within one
installation of SAP. With clients, a distinction can be made between the actual business and
test or practice businesses that are used to test a new module
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI
or to train the work force. By
Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA
constructing a ‘practice client’, members of staff can practice with the business data to their
hearts’ content without influencing the actual business operation.

Client
The client is the highest organizational level (Figure 4.1). There is usually only one client for
Client
the entire organization/concern. Several clients could be used for different organizations using
theThesame SAPis S/4HANA
client the highest installation, or for
organizational leveltesting and4.1).
(Figure training.
ThereClients haveonly
is usually separate and
one client
unrelated data.
for the entire organization/concern. Several clients could be used for different organizations
using the same SAP S/4HANA installation, or for testing and training. Clients have separate
Company
and unrelated data.
Each client can contain a number of companies. A company is often used for the subsidiary
companies within a concern. Each company is identified as unique by an alphanumeric code
of four characters, and is intended as an organizationally and legally independent entity, with
its own balance and revenue accountability. SAP makes automatic consolidation possible of
Company
the financial accounting for all businesses that have a client. It is also possible to consolidate
several clientscan
Each client by contain
using the ‘legal consolidation’
a number of companies. module.
A company is often used for the subsidiary
companies within a concern. Each company is identified as unique by an alphanumeric
code of four characters, and is intended 38as an organizationally and legally independent
entity, with its own balance and revenue accountability. SAP makes automatic consolidation
possible of the financial accounting for all businesses that have a client. It is also possible
to consolidate
HANDS-ON several
WITH SAP ERP clients by using the ‘legal consolidation’
AND IDES module.
Organization depicted in SAP S/4

Figure 4.1
Figure 4.1 Organization
Organization structure financial
structure financial

Controlling area
A controlling area is an organizational unit within a company, used to represent a closed system
for cost accounting purposes. A controlling area may include single or multiple company codes
that may use different currencies. These company codes must use the same operative chart of
accounts. All internal allocations refer exclusively to objects in the same controlling area.
38
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA

Controlling area
A controlling area is an organizational unit within a company, used to represent a closed
system for cost accounting purposes. A controlling area may include single or multiple
company codes that may use different currencies. These company codes must use the same
operative chart of accounts. All internal allocations refer exclusively to objects in the same
controlling area.

Operating concern
Operating concerns are the accountability areas within a business that are used for the
allocation of costs to cost centers. Each cost center is allocated to an operating concern.
Each operating
HANDS-ON concern
WITH SAP ERP AND IDES can represent more than one company.
Organization depicted in SAP S/4

Figure 4.2Organization
Figure 4.2 Organization structure
structure controlling
controlling

Plant
Businesses can also be subdivided into operational facilities called plants, which are used in
Plant
the logistic module. Various storage locations can be allocated to each plant. Plants and
business areas
Businesses can are
alsonot
be mutually exclusive.
subdivided For example,
into operational a plant
facilities can make
called plants,various
which products,
are used
which are paid for in different business areas. In the same way, a business area
in the logistic module. Various storage locations can be allocated to each plant. Plants can handle
and
products from various plants.
business areas are not mutually exclusive. For example, a plant can make various products,
which are paid for in different business areas. In the same way, a business area can handle
Storage location
products from various plants.
The organizational unit storage location can consist of various storage areas. Storage locations
allow the differentiation between the various stocks of a material in a plant. The units are
important for the valuation (FI) and planning (PP).

39
Businesses can also be subdivided into operational facilities called plants, which are used in
the logistic module. Various storage locations can be allocated to each plant. Plants and
business areas are not mutually exclusive. For example, a plant can make various products,
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA
which are paid for in different business areas. In the same way, a business area can handle
products from various plants.
Storage location
Storage location
The organizational unit storage location can consist of various storage areas. Storage locations
The organizational
allow unit storage
the differentiation location
between can consist
the various stocksof of
various storage
a material in areas. Storage
a plant. The locations
units are
allow the differentiation between the various stocks
important for the valuation (FI) and planning (PP). of a material in a plant. The units are
important for the valuation (FI) and planning (PP).

Figure 4.3
Figure 4.3Organization
Organizationstructure logistics
structure logistics

4.3 PROJECTING THE BUSINESS STRUCTURE IN SAP S/4HANA


Usually, there is more than one way of depicting the concepts/departments as they exist in
the enterprise. The different possible representations will, however, have certain consequences.
If a particular alternative is simpler to implement, the result of this will frequently be
that certain information needed in the longer term cannot be obtained from the system.
Conversely, a more complex alternative will have the consequence that more information
can be obtained from the system, but the users will need more training to use the system
properly and to interpret the information correctly.

40
Example 4.1

A university has decided that each faculty be depicted in


SAP as a company with a company code, instead of having
one company code for the whole university.

Once a particular set-up has been chosen, it may be difficult to change it. Due consideration
should therefore be given to this set-up: it is important not only to look at current information
needs, but also the information that the system may be required to process in the future.

40
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA

4.4 SAP HIERARCHY


Within SAP, there are a number of concepts which can be considered as the framework of
the system. They form the so-called ‘corporate structure’ or organizational structure. These
concepts are important because all information that is registered in the system is linked to
these concepts. Many of these concepts will be explained in this chapter. In the first place,
the SAP hierarchy is explained; this can be considered to serve as the backbone for the
concepts. Then the concepts of the most important modules will be illustrated. In doing this
you will use ERDs (Entity-Relation-Diagrams) to clarify the relation /allocations between
the separate concepts. In the ERD there is an indication of which concepts are related to
each other and whether there are any ‘n-on-m’ relations.

Client
The highest level distinguished is that of the client. On logging in, this must be instantiated.
Each client is a detached, individual work environment. Frequently, within one enterprise
use is made of a production environment (the actual system), a training environment and
a test environment.

Nearly all customizing activities are related to one client. In other words, an activity only
affects the client in which a user is working.

Company code
The most important concept within a client is the company code. A company code represents
an independent legal entity with fiscal obligations. All data relating to the flow of funds
are linked to the company code (see Figure 4.4). All separate financial concepts should
ultimately lead to one balance sheet and one profit and loss statement, which is sent to the
tax authorities (and the shareholders).

The most important data that are recorded are the following:
1. Chart of Accounts (general ledger accounting)
2. Currency
3. Address

41
The most important data that are recorded are the following:
1. Chart of Accounts (general ledger accounting)
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA
2. Currency
3. Address

Figure 4.4
Figure 4.4SAP hierarchy
SAP hierarchy

Plant
The plant is the concept to which logistical data are linked. As Figure 4.4 shows, there is an
allocation from the plant to the company code. This means that the financial consequences of
Plant
a logistical process can be passed on directly (provided they have been implemented) to the
The plant is the concept to which logistical data are linked. As Figure 4.4 shows, there is an
financial modules.
allocation from the plant to the company code. This means that the financial consequences
of
In asetting
logistical
up aprocess can be
plant, only thepassed onmust
address directly (provided
be entered. Atthey have
a later beenallimplemented)
stage, to
sorts of control
the financialwill
parameters modules.
be linked to the plant. Control data are data that determine how the s ystem
reacts in different situations.
In setting up a plant, only the address must be entered. At a later stage, all sorts of control
parameters will be linked to the plant. Control data are data that determine how the system
Example 4.2
reacts in different situations.
Various sorts of materials will be entered in various general ledger accounts in the accounts scheme.
This takes place by means of4.2
Example control parameters.

Various sorts of materials will be entered in various general


ledger accounts in the accounts scheme. This takes place
by means of control parameters.

Storage location
Storage locations are used for the stock registration of materials. With a storage location,
only a code and a specification are recorded. The reason that no address is recorded is that
it is assumed that the storage location is situated in the same place as the plant.
42

Storage locations are important in SAP for very complicated stock registrations, production
planning (PP) and requirement planning. The modules concerned will not be discussed in
this chapter.

42
Storage location
Storage locations are used for the stock registration of materials. With a storage location, only
a code andWITH
HANDS-ON a specification
SAP S/4HANAare
ANDrecorded.
GBI The reason that no addressDepicted
Organization is recorded is that
in SAP it is
S/4HANA
assumed that the storage location is situated in the same place as the plant.

4.5 FINANCIAL
Storage locations (FI) in SAP for very complicated stock registrations, production
are important
planning
The (PP) and structures
organization requirementin planning.
Financial The
can modules concerned
be subdivided into:will not be discussed in this
chapter.
• Group company
4.5 FINANCIAL (FI)
• Controlling area
The organization structures in Financial can be subdivided into:
• Profit centre

• Group company
• Controlling area
• Profit centre
Group company
Group
If company
a company has a number of subsidiary companies, it is also obliged to issue consolidated
annual accounts.
If a company has By way of the
a number group company
of subsidiary SAP itprovides
companies, the possibility
is also obliged to issueofconsolidated
having this
annual accounts.
consolidation By wayentirely
executed of the by
group
the company
system. SAP provides the possibility of having this
consolidation executed entirely by the system.
Naturally, adjustments will have to be made here too (for example, to exclude reciprocal
Naturally, between
deliveries adjustments will company
parent have to be
andmade here too
subsidiary (forThese
etc.). example, to exclude
adjustments are reciprocal
linked to
deliveries between parent company and subsidiary etc.). These adjustments are linked to the
the group company.
group company.

Figure 4.5
Figure 4.5Group
Groupcompany
company

Controlling area
An organizational unit within a company, used to represent a closed system for cost accounting
Controlling area
purposes. A controlling area may include single or multiple company codes that may use
different
An currencies.
organizational These
unit company
within codesused
a company, musttouse the same
represent operative
a closed systemchart
for of
costaccounts. All
accounting
internal allocations refer exclusively to objects in the same controlling area.
purposes. A controlling area may include single or multiple company codes that may use
different currencies. These company codes must use the same operative chart of accounts.
All internal
HANDS-ON allocations
WITH SAP ERP AND IDES refer exclusively to objects in the same controlling
Organization depictedarea.
in SAP S/4

Figure
Figure4.6 Controlling
4.6 areaarea
Controlling
43

Example 4.3

A international enterprise has several subsidiaries in the Netherlands. Cost can be analysed per country
with the use of a controlling area for the Netherlands.
43
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA

Example 4.3
Figure 4.6 Controlling area
A international enterprise has several subsidiaries in the
Netherlands. Cost can be analysed per country with the
use of a controlling area for the
Example 4.3Netherlands.

A international enterprise has several subsidiaries in the Netherlands. Cost can be analysed per country
with the use of a controlling area for the Netherlands.

Profit center
Profit
As cancenter
be seen from Figure 4.7, the profit center is an unrelated concept, not linked to any
As canconcept.
other be seen from Figure
A profit 4.7, isthe
center profit
used to center
produce is balances
an unrelated
and concept, notLoss
Profit and linked to any
accounts.
other concept.
The profit A profit
center is notcenter is used to produce
an independent balances
legal entity. and Profit
It does and Losshave
not therefore accounts. The
to comply
profit center
with the is not
legal an independent
requirements legal entity.
for external It does not therefore have to comply with the
accounting.
legal requirements for external accounting.

Figure 4.7Profit
Figure 4.7 Profit center
center

In aa company,
In company,ititisis often
often standard
standard practice
practice to
to assign
assign some profit accountability
accountability to departments.
departments.
This
This profit
profit isis generated
generated byby the
the services/products
services/products that they deliver
deliver to
to other
other departments
departments or
or
customers. By using profit centers this can be registered
customers. By using profit centers this can be registered in SAP. in SAP.

Example 4.4
Example 4.4
An international enterprise can analyze the costs and revenues
An international enterprise can analyze the costs and revenues per product group by creating within the
per product group by creating within the controlling area
controlling area the next profit centers: Printers, Desktops and Laptops.
the next profit centers: Printers, Desktops and Laptops.

4.6 MATERIAL MANAGEMENT (MM)

Purchasing organization
All data relating to suppliers, delivery addresses and conditions of payment are allocated
to the purchasing organization. Figure 4.8 shows that there is an allocation both with the
financial concepts and with the logistical concepts. In the case of procurement and suppliers,
both financial and logistical information is recorded. Of course, a purchasing organization
can only be allocated one company code. The conditions of payment and receipt of goods
are accordingly entered in one account scheme.44 A company may have several purchasing
organizations. The subdivision into several purchasing organizations may, for example, be
based on location or on the sort of products that are being purchased.

44
financial and logistical information is recorded. Of course, a purchasing organization can only
be allocated one company code. The conditions of payment and receipt of goods are
accordingly entered in one account scheme. A company may have several purchasing
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA
organizations. The subdivision into several purchasing organizations may, for example, be
based on location or on the sort of products that are being purchased.

Figure4.8
Figure 4.8 Purchasing
Purchasing organization
organization

Furthermore, it is possible to make purchases for several plants. It can also occur that a plant
Furthermore,
can be served byit several
is possible to make
purchasing purchases for
organizations. several itplants.
Although is not It can alsoin occur
indicated thatina
the ERD
Figure 4.8 be
plant can thatserved
there by
is aseveral
relationship between
purchasing the plant and
organizations. the company
Although code,
it is not nevertheless,
indicated in the
itERD
doesin
exist. The4.8
Figure factthat
is that the ispurchasing
there organization
a relationship betweencantheonly be and
plant linked
thetocompany
the plantscode,
that
fall under the same company code. If that were not the case, the system would
nevertheless, it does exist. The fact is that the purchasing organization can only be linked not know
under which company code which part of the profit should be entered.
to the plants that fall under the same company code. If that were not the case, the system
would not know under which company code which part of the profit should be entered.
Example 4.5
Example 4.5
A wholesaler supplies car components (batteries, towbars and tires) to repair companies. It has three
A wholesaler
distribution centers for this in supplies
Amsterdam,car Rotterdam
components and(batteries,
Eindhoven,towbars
where the purchasing
and tires) to repair companies. It has three distribution
department is located. Its activities are subdivided into batteries, towbars and tires. In SAP, this is
centers
realized by using three for(=this
plants in logistical
three Amsterdam, Rotterdam
streams), anddistribution
one for each Eindhoven, center. In addition,
where the purchasing department is located. Its activities
three purchasing organizations have been set up which are subdivided into the various product groups.
Each purchasing organization
are subdividedis linked
intotobatteries,
each plant,towbars
so that each
anddistribution center
tires. In SAP, thiscan be furnished
with the various product groups.
is realized by using three plants (= three logistical streams),
one for each distribution center. In addition, three purchasing
organizations have been set up which are subdivided into
4.7 SALES AND theDISTRIBUTION
various product (SD) groups. Each purchasing organization
is linked toineach
The organization structures Salesplant, so that each can
and Distribution distribution centerinto
be subdivided can three groups:
be furnished with the various product groups.
• Externally oriented sales organization
• Internally oriented sales organization
• Distribution
4.7 SALES AND DISTRIBUTION (SD)
4.6.1 EXTERNALLY ORIENTED SALES ORGANIZATION
The organization structures in Sales and Distribution can be subdivided into three groups:
The concepts concerned here describe the market and the possibilities which are offered to
customers relating to deliveries, price conditions etc. This includes the following four entities:
• Externally oriented sales organization
• Internally oriented sales organization
• Sales organization
• Distribution 44
45

45
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA

4.7.1 EXTERNALLY ORIENTED SALES ORGANIZATION

The concepts concerned here describe the market and the possibilities which are offered to
customers relating to deliveries, price conditions etc. This includes the following four entities:

• Sales organization
• Distribution channel
• Product area
• WITH
HANDS-ON Sales areaAND IDES
SAP ERP Organization depicted in SAP S/4

• Distribution channel
• Product area
Sales •organization
Sales area
Sales organization
This is an organization unit that is responsible for the sale of particular products or services.
This
This issales
an organization
unit also hasunit that
legal is responsible
liability for the
in relation sale of particular
to damages. products
A complete sales or services.
transaction
This
takessales
placeunitwithin
also has
onelegal liability
sales in relation(This
organization. to damages. A complete
sales translation sales transaction
consists of quotationtakesÞ
place
orderwithin one sales
Þ delivery organization.
Þ invoice). Often,(This
salessales translationmirror
organizations consists
theofdivision
quotation of  order 
a particular
delivery  invoice). Often, sales organizations mirror the division of a particular market
market geographically.
geographically.

Figure
Figure 4.9 4.9
SalesSales organization
organization

Example 4.6
Example 4.6
The wholesaler mentioned before supplies his products to
car repairbefore
The wholesaler mentioned companies
supplieslocated all over
his products the
to car Netherlands.
repair companies For
located all over the
this purpose, there are three sales organizations operating
Netherlands. For this purpose, there are three sales organizations operating in
in the northern, central and
the northern, central
southern Netherlands, respectively. and southern Netherlands, respectively.

Distribution channels
ADistribution
distribution channels
channel denotes the manner in which products or services arrive at the
customer. A more usual term for distribution channel is sales route. As the diagram shows,
A distribution channel denotes the manner in which products or services arrive at the
one distribution channel can be used in several sales organizations. A sales organization can
customer.
make use ofAseveral
more usual term for
distribution distribution channel is sales route. As the diagram shows,
channels.
one distribution channel can be used in several sales organizations. A sales organization can
make use of several distribution channels.

Figure 4.10 Distribution channel

46
Example 4.7
Distribution channels
A distribution channel denotes the manner in which products or services arrive at the
customer. A more usual term for distribution channel is sales route. As the diagram shows,
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA
one distribution channel can be used in several sales organizations. A sales organization can
make use of several distribution channels.

Figure 4.10
Figure 4.10Distribution
Distributionchannel
channel

Example 4.7 Example 4.7

The wholesaler makes use of three different distribution


The wholesaler makes use of three different distribution channels:
channels:
• Internet • Internet
• Franchise •chains
Franchise chains
• Other garages
• Other garages
All three sales organizations use the
All three sales channel franchise
organizations chains
use the and other
channel garages.
franchise Sales organization
chains
central Netherlands also delivers via the Internet.
and other garages. Sales organization central Netherlands
also delivers via the Internet.
46

A Distribution channel also has an allocation with a Plant. Each sales organization is free
to determine Distribution channels, through which the plants can be supplied. For the
combination of Distribution channel and sales organization it can therefore be established
from which plant (or plants) supplies can be provided. A Distribution channel can get
supplies from several plants, and a plant can have several Distribution channels allocated to it.

Example 4.8

Central Netherlands supplies by Internet from Rotterdam


or Eindhoven. The necessary assignments are:

• Internet – Central Netherlands – Rotterdam


• Internet – Central Netherlands – Eindhoven

Division
A division is used to group materials, products or services. A material is grouped in one
division. Price agreements with a particular client can be allocated to these groupings. In
addition, sales statistics can be generated per division. Divisions can be used in several sales
organizations, while within one sales organization products from several divisions can be sold.

47
Division
A division is used to group materials, products or services. A material is grouped in one
division. Price agreements with a particular client can be allocated to these groupings. In
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI
addition, sales statistics can be generated per division. Organization
Divisions can Depicted in SAP S/4HANA
be used in several sales
organizations, while within one sales organization products from several divisions can be sold.

Figure 4.11
Figure 4.11Division
Division

Example 4.9 Example 4.9


The products are divided into three divisions: Batteries,
The products are divided into three divisions: Batteries, Tow bars and Tires (these are the same divisions as
Tow bars and Tires (these are the same divisions as in
in the Purchasing department). Tires are sold in each sales organization. Batteries are not sold in Southern
the Purchasing department). Tires are sold in each sales
Netherlands, tow bars are not sold in Northern Netherlands.
organization. Batteries are not sold in Southern Netherlands,
tow bars are not sold in Northern Netherlands.
Sales area
The sales area diverges from the three concepts named above. In fact, in the case of a sales
organization, distribution channel and a division, a code and a description are established. With
Sales
a salesarea
area this is not established. A sales area is understood to be the combination of one
sales organization, one Distribution channel and one division. This consists therefore of one
The sales area diverges from the three concepts named above. In fact, in the case of a sales
allocation. With the sales area it is established through which distribution channels a group of
organization, distribution channel and a division, a code and a description are established.
materials (division) can be delivered. In view of the fact that this can vary per sales
With a sales area
organization, it is this is not established.
established A sales area is understood to be the combination
per sales organization.
of one sales organization, one Distribution channel and one division. This consists therefore
Theone
of distribution
allocation.channels
With theand divisions
sales area it are already allocated
is established throughtowhich
the sales organization.
distribution The
channels
aallocation
group ofofmaterials
the distribution
(division)channel
can beand the division
delivered. within
In view of the sales organization
fact that this can can
varythus
per
only be
sales effected with
organization, it the distributionper
is established channels and the divisions that are allocated to the sales
sales organization.
organization concerned.
The distribution channels and divisions are already allocated to the sales organization. The
47
allocation of the distribution channel and the division within the sales organization can
thus only be effected with the distribution channels and the divisions that are allocated to
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Organization depicted in SAP S/4
the sales organization concerned.

Figure
Figure4.12
4.12Sales area
Sales area

Example 4.10

For the Central Netherlands sales organization you have the following distribution channels (see the
examples above): Internet, Franchise chains and other garages. Furthermore, there are the following
divisions: Batteries, Tow bars, Tires.

The following sales areas have been assigned:


48
• Central Netherlands – Internet – Batteries
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA

Example 4.10

For the Central Netherlands sales organization you have the


following distribution channels (see the examples above):
Internet, Franchise chains and other garages. Furthermore,
there are the following divisions: Batteries, Tow bars, Tires.

The following sales areas have been assigned:

• Central Netherlands – Internet – Batteries


• Central Netherlands – Internet – Tires
• Central Netherlands – Franchise chains – Batteries
• Central Netherlands – Franchise chains – Tow bars
• Central Netherlands – Franchise chains – Tires
• Etc.

4.7.2 INTERNALLY ORIENTED SALES ORGANIZATION

These concepts describe how the sales department can be organized within the company
(with respect to accountability etc.):

• Sales office
• Sales group

Sales office
The sales office is the department of the company that is responsible for the sale of particular
products through a particular distribution channel.

As Figure 4.13 shows, several sales areas can be allocated to a sales office. A sales area can
be used by several sales offices. As the sales office is allocated to the sales area, it is therefore
also allocated to the sales organization. The sales organization is in its turn allocated to the
company code, so that the results can be automatically entered into the financial modules.

49
As Figure 4.13 shows, several sales areas can be allocated to a sales office. A sales area can be
used by several sales offices. As the sales office is allocated to the sales area, it is therefore also
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA
allocated to the sales organization. The sales organization is in its turn allocated to the company
code, so that the results can be automatically entered into the financial modules.

Figure 4.13
Figure 4.13Sales office
Sales office

Example 4.11
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Organization depicted in SAP S/4
In the northern Netherlands there are two sales offices –
48
one for sales through the route run and one for the express
run. It would also have been possible to subdivide the sales
offices into the various Example
product4.11
groups or sorts of clients.

In the northern Netherlands there are two sales offices – one for sales through the route run and one
for the express run. It would also have been possible to subdivide the sales offices into the various
product groups or sorts of clients.
Sales group
Salescategory
This group makes it possible to group together the sales assistants who are involved in
Thissame
the category
sales makes it possible
activities. A salestogroup
groupcan
together the sales
perform sales activities
assistants for
whoseveral
are involved in the
sales offices.
same sales activities. A sales group can perform sales activities for several sales offices.
Several sales groups can be operative in one sales office. These sales groups make it possible Several
sales
for groupsaccountability
various can be operativeareas intoone sales office.
be defined withinThese sales office.
the sales groups make it possible for
various accountability areas to be defined within the sales office.

Figure 4.14
Figure 4.14 Sales
Salesgroup
group

Example 4.12
Example 4.12
Northern Netherlands has three sales groups: route run,
Northern Netherlands
expresshas three sales representatives.
run and groups: route run, express run and
The route representatives.
run and the The route run
and the express run groups receive all the orders. The representatives visit the most important clients
express run groups receive all the orders. The representatives
to maintain contacts
visit and
the to takeimportant
most orders. They can take
clients to orders
maintainfor contacts
both the route
and run
to and the express
run and they are therefore
take orders. assigned to both
They can take sales offices.
orders for The
bothroute
the run and run
route express run are only
assigned to one sales office (route run office and express run office
and the express run and they are therefore assigned to respectively).
both sales offices. The route run and express run are only
assigned to one sales office (route run office and express
run office respectively).
4.6.3 DISTRIBUTION

This paragraph describes basic elements of shipment processing organization. This includes:

• Shipping point
• Loading point

Shipping point
50
From the shipping point the goods are sent to the customer. This location can be physical (e.g.
Example 4.12

Northern Netherlands has three sales groups: route run, express run and representatives. The route run
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Organization Depicted in SAP S/4HANA
and the express run groups receive all the orders. The representatives visit the most important clients
to maintain contacts and to take orders. They can take orders for both the route run and the express
run and they are therefore assigned to both sales offices. The route run and express run are only
4.7.3 DISTRIBUTION
assigned to one sales office (route run office and express run office respectively).
This paragraph describes basic elements of shipment processing organization. This includes:

• Shipping point
4.6.3 DISTRIBUTION
• Loading point
This paragraph describes basic elements of shipment processing organization. This includes:

• Shipping point
• Loading point
Shipping point
Shipping
From the point
shipping point the goods are sent to the customer. This location can be physical
(e.g.
Fromathecollection
shippingof loading
point bays are
the goods at the
sentstorage location), This
to the customer. but location
it is alsocan
possible to define
be physical (e.g.
a collection
group of employees
of loading bays at the storage location), but it is also possible to define a groupfor
as a shipping point (a group of employees who are responsible of
employees shipping
particular as a shipping pointA (ashipping
activities). group of employees
point whoseveral
can service are responsible forplants
plants, while particular
can
shipping activities). A shipping point
also make use of several shipping points. can service several plants, while plants can also make use
of several shipping points.

Figure 4.15 Shipping point 49

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Organization depicted in SAP S/4
Example 4.13
Figure 4.15 Shipping point
As mentioned earlier, the wholesaler has set up three
plants (=three logistical flows) in SAP, with a corresponding
storage location. ThreeExample
shipping
4.13points have also been set
up – Amsterdam, Rotterdam and Eindhoven.
As mentioned earlier, the wholesaler has set up three plants (=three logistical flows) in SAP, with a
corresponding storage location. Three shipping points have also been set up – Amsterdam, Rotterdam
and Eindhoven.

Loading points
Loading points can also be used if no loading points have been established. If use is to
The SD module
The SD module
be made can also be
of the extensive used if norelating
possibilities loading to
points
stockhave been established.
registration, If use is points
delivery loading to be
made
shouldofbe
theestablished.
extensive possibilities relating
As Figure 4.16 to stock
shows, registration,
a loading point delivery
can onlyloading points should
be allocated to one
be established.
shipping point. As Figure 4.16 shows, a loading point can only be allocated to one shippi ng
point.

Figure
Figure4.16
4.16Loading point
Loading point

51
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Customizing

5 CUSTOMIZING
Customizing in SAP means the adaptation of the system to meet the wishes and requirements
of the organization which is to use SAP. The adaptation is accomplished by means of setting
up an enormous number of control parameters, which in turn determine how SAP responds
to specific actions.

SAP implementation has the effect of bringing about major changes in the majority of
operational processes and in the work procedures used by the majority of the organization’s
employees. A good deal of consideration and attention has to be given to these issues. In
most cases, a special project will be initiated to serve the purposes of the implementation,
drawing on the services of external consultants who are able to supply (additional) operational
know-how and knowledge of SAP. In this chapter customizing is mentioned.

5.1 SCOPE OF THE IMPLEMENTATION


The scope of the project, i.e. the range of operational processes initially to be covered by
SAP, determines the focus of attention of this implementation project.

It is often impossible to make immediate use of all the SAP modules that would be of
benefit to the organization, for the following reasons:

1. The project would either take too long as a result, or the number of people
working on the project would become so large that the management of the
project would be jeopardized.
2. The impact on the organization caused by the implementation would be so
extensive that there would be a major likelihood that the system would meet
resistance and not be accepted.
3. Another problem would be that employees responsible for the maintenance of
the system would lack the knowledge needed to carry out their tasks owing to
the sheer complexity of the implementation.

An option frequently adopted is to implement only the financial modules or only the
logistics modules, as a first step.

It is vitally important that the scope of the implementation (defined at the start of the
project) is properly monitored. Proposals for improvement, which will almost certainly arise
from within the organization during the project, are likely to be phrased in terms like ‘Now

52
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Customizing

that you are already working on…’, ‘Wouldn’t it be a good idea to…’, etc. If attention is
paid to these proposals, both the project’s duration and the budget for the project will be
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Intelligent Enterprise
under threat.

It is vitally important that the scope of the implementation (defined at the start of the project)
is properly monitored. Proposals for improvement, which will almost certainly arise from
within the organization during the project, are likely to be phrased in terms like ‘Now that you
5.2 THE APPROACH TO THE PROJECT
are already working on…’, ‘Wouldn’t it be a good idea to…’, etc. If attention is paid to these
proposals,
In both the
an extensive project’s
project likeduration andtime
the first the budget for the project
implementation will be
of SAP, it under threat.
is vital that an
approach/method should be selected which will provide sound direction for the project as
a5.2
whole.THE APPROACH
A standard TO THE
software PROJECTmethodology could be used for the purpose, for
development
instance, though aproject
In an extensive numberlikeof the
the activities,
first timemainly in the functional
implementation of SAP,andit technical system
is vital that an
development
approach/method phases, will be
should beselected
superfluous
whichinwilltheprovide
implementation of a for
sound direction standard package.
the project as a
whole.
It A standard
is more worthwhilesoftware
to makedevelopment methodology
use of a specific RAD could(RapidbeApplication
used for theDevelopment)
purpose, for
instance, since
method, thoughthese
a number
methods of are
the more
activities, mainly
suited in the functional
to prototyping, andthe
evaluate technical
design system
with a
development
working system. phases, will be superfluous in the implementation of a standard package. It is
more worthwhile to make use of a specific RAD (Rapid Application Development) method,
since these methods are more suited to prototyping, evaluate the design with a working system.
SAP also offers its own implementation method, i.e. the Procedure Model. This method is
supported
SAP also offersby theitscustomizing module from
own implementation version
method, i.e. 3theand onwards.Model.
Procedure The ‘implementation
This method is
partners’
supportedalso by frequently make use
the customizing of this
module frommethod.
version These
3 andare onwards.
the companies that assist with
The ‘implementation
partners’
the also frequently
implementation (e.g.make use of CapGemini,
Accenture, this method. CTac).
These are the companies that assist with
the implementation (e.g. Accenture, CapGemini, CTac).
Figure 5.1 shows the Procedure Model. Each phase is divided into a number of ‘Working
Figure 5.1 which
Packages’, shows are
the then
Procedure Model.
subdivided Each
into phase is divided into a number of ‘Working
activities.
Packages’, which are then subdivided into activities.

Figure 5.1
Figure 5.1Procedure model
Procedure model

53
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Customizing

5.3 CONFUSING TERMINOLOGY


There may be some confusion with regard to the difference between Business Process Re-
engineering (sometimes referred to as Business Process Redesign), on the one hand, and
Business Engineering on the other hand.

Business Process Re-engineering (BPR) is the (partial) redesign of existing operational processes,
including the automation of these existing operational processes.

Business Engineering (BE) is the development of radical, new and integral process-orientated
operational solutions supported by information technology. BE therefore goes further than
BPR.

A number of synonyms are used. This is a tiresome feature from one perspective, though
it is a situation you often encounter in practice. Here is a brief survey of terms, which is
intended to avoid confusion.

The authors mean the same thing when they use the following concepts:

• Reference model
• Business Blueprint

5.4 CUSTOMIZING
Adaptation or customizing of SAP is not forbidden, but changes to settings can have far-
reaching consequences. We kindly but emphatically request you to be very careful with
regard to any small adaptations you may make to the system. If in any doubt, please ask
the system administrator for permission first. You are not permitted to make any changes
to cross-client settings!

You can do almost anything with the system, so deal prudently with this responsibility.
Every action you take is recorded, which means it is always possible to find out who entered
specific data or made specific changes!

Customizing is carried out using the Implementation Guide (IMG). This contains both texts
and illustrations on customizing and lists the customizing options available. The option is
in GBI not possible with the launchpad. You will find the IMG by logging on to SAP S/4
with the SAP GUI with:

SAP menu → Tools → Customizing → IMG → Project Management

54
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Customizing

The ‘SAP Reference IMG’ button brings the guide into view.

A indicates that there are sub-chapters. If there are no sub-chapters, you will be able to
read the text or carry out the function . It is also possible to search for a specific chapter

55
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Intelligent Enterprise

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Intelligent Enterprise

6 INTELLIGENT ENTERPRISE
6 INTELLIGENT ENTERPRISE
Large companies and companies using their systems to collaborate with other companies
and customers will need more systems than SAP S/4HANA. The systems from SAP will be
Large companies
mentioned as part of and
the companies
Intelligent using their systems
Enterprise. to collaborate
The C-Business withwill
diagrams other
be companies
introducedand
customers will need more systems than SAP S/4HANA. The systems from SAP will be
in the last paragraph.
mentioned as part of the Intelligent Enterprise. The C-Business diagrams will be introduced
in the last paragraph.

6.1 INTELLIGENT ENTERPRISE


6.1 INTELLIGENT ENTERPRISE
According to SAP: ‘Intelligent Enterprises use the latest technologies to turn insight into
According
action to SAP:
across the ‘Intelligent
business – in realEnterprises
time. As ause the latest
result, they technologies to turn insight
accelerate data-driven into action
innovation
andacross theautomation,
process business – inlaunch
real time.
new As a result,models,
business they accelerate data-driven experiences,
deliver exceptional innovation and
andprocess automation,
more. An launch
Intelligent new business
Enterprise connectsmodels, deliverand
experiences exceptional experiences,
operations and more.
using experience
An Intelligent Enterprise connects experiences and operations using experience
management (XM) solutions, a business technology platform, and a suite of applications.’ management
(XM) solutions, a business technology platform, and a suite of applications.’

Data is a key driver behind the decisions made about the business, the strategy, and
Data is a key driver behind the decisions made about the business, the strategy, and ultimately
ultimately the desired business outcomes. Operational data, or O-data for short, looks at
the desired business outcomes. Operational data, or O-data for short, looks at transactions
transactions from a business point of view. In essence, it reveals what happens. To get the
from a business point of view. In essence, it reveals what happens. To get the complete picture,
complete picture,
however, however, it
it is important to isalso
important to also
understand understand
experience data, experience
or X-data. data,
X-dataorgives
X-data.
insight
X-data gives insight into why something happens. X-data is gathered
into why something happens. X-data is gathered by capturing human sentiment from by capturing human
customers,
sentiment fromemployees,
customers, and business
employees, andpartners
businessatpartners
key moments to provide
at key moments an immediate
to provide an
immediate understanding of the quality of their experience. This is particularly important at
understanding of the quality of their experience. This is particularly important as we look
providing
as we look at the best possible
providing business
the best outcomes.
possible business outcomes.

SAP:
SAP: TheThe Intelligent
Intelligent Enterprise:
Enterprise: TurningInsight
Turning Insightinto
into Action.
Action. An unprecedented
unprecedented volume
volumeand
andvariety
varietyof
of X-data
X-data and O-data
O-data are
are now
nowavailable
availabletotoyour
yourbusiness,
business, driven
driven by by trends
trends andand
innovations
innovations such
such as social
as social media,chatbots,
media, chatbots,conversational
conversationalAI,
AI,and
and the
the Internet
Internet of
of Things.
Things.But
Butsimply
simplyhaving
havingthis
thisdata does
data notnot
does deliver intrinsic
deliver value.
intrinsic TheThe
value. real real
valuevalue
comes whenwhen
comes you connect
you
experience and operational data with advanced technologies, such as augmented analytics, AI,
machine learning, and in-memory data management in the cloud, to deliver intelligence that
not only improves real-time decision making but can also predict future behavior and
outcomes to better guide your success in the future.’
56
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Intelligent Enterprise

connect experience and operational data with advanced technologies, such as augmented
analytics, AI, machine learning, and in-memory data management in the cloud, to deliver
intelligence that not only improves real-time decision making but can also predict future
behavior and outcomes to better guide your success in the future.’
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Intelligent

SAP groups the systems as a complete solution for an intelligent enterprise. S/4HANA is
Digital core. The data are stored in a HANA database. Analytics are done with SAP Analy
SAP groups the systems as a complete solution for an intelligent enterprise. S/4HANA is
Cloud (SAC).
the Digital core. The data are stored in a HANA database. Analytics are done with SAP
Analytics Cloud (SAC).

In this picture the SAP products are placed as part of the Intelligent Suite.

6.2 COLLABORATIVE BUSINESS


SAP considers C-Business as the successor to E-Business. C-Business means collabora
57
between suppliers and customers as a result of which suppliers and customers appear to
SAP groups the systems as a complete solution for an intelligent enterprise.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI
S/4HANA is the
Intelligent Enterprise
Digital core. The data are stored in a HANA database. Analytics are done with SAP Analytics
Cloud (SAC).

In this picture the SAP products are placed as part of the Intelligent Suite.
In this picture the SAP products are placed as part of the Intelligent Suite.
6.2 COLLABORATIVE BUSINESS
SAP considers C-Business as the successor to E-Business. C-Business means collaboration
between suppliers and customers as a result of which suppliers and customers appear to be
6.2 COLLABORATIVE
working in one company. This functionality should result in an optimal value chain.
SAP considers C-Business as the successor to E-Business. C-Business means collaboration
Collaborative Business Maps (C-Business Maps) give a blueprint of how the SAP E-Business
between suppliers and customers as a result of which suppliers and customers appear to be
platform could be set in for various industries. SAP uses these diagrams to depict the
working in one
communication company.
with This(suppliers
the outside functionality should result
and customers). In in
thisanbook
optimal
you value chain.
use C -Business
55

Collaborative Business Maps (C-Business Maps) give a blueprint of how the SAP
E-Business platform could be set in for various industries. SAP uses these diagrams to
depict the communication with the outside (suppliers and customers). In this book you
use C-Business diagrams for processes and to focus on the collaboration between the
departments within a company.

58
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Intelligent Enterprise

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Intelligent Enterprise


diagrams for processes and to focus on the collaboration between the departments within a
company.

Figure6.4
Figure 6.4 C-Business
C-Business diagram
diagram

56

59
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI GBI

7 GBI
The SAP training material uses the dataset IDES (International Demo and Educational
System). For example the training for the process integration with S/4HANA with official
SAP certificate TS410, uses this dataset for hans-on exercises. This is a very complete and
complex dataset with examples for almost any process in SAP.

The SAP UA (University Alliances) developed a much less complex dataset for teaching at
schools and universities. These exercises and dataset to support these exercises are mostly
developed by the SAP UCC’s (University Competence Center). These centers are not part
of the SAP company, but affiliated to universities.

A general understanding of Global Bike (the enterprise) prior to embarking on hands-on


exercises and case studies in the SAP S/4 client is critical for success.

This narrative provides a historical background for how Global Bike began and an overview
of its operations and strategy. This information will be used extensively throughout the
curriculum material. The Global Bike data set has exclusively been created for SAP UA
(University Alliances) global curricula.

In this chapter, the structure of the GBI database will be described in brief.

7.1 SHORT DESCRIPTION OF GBI


The Global Bike Group has a pragmatic design philosophy that comes from its deep roots
in both the off-road trail racing and long-distance road racing sports. Nearly 20 years ago,
its founders designed their first bikes out of necessity—they had races to win and the
bikes that were available at the time did not perform to their extremely high standards. So,
they took matters into their own hands and built legendary bikes that would outlast and
outperform the competition. From these humble origins, Global Bike Incorporated was
born and continues to deliver innovative high-performance bicycles to the world’s most
demanding riders.

This heritage of entrepreneurial spirit and quest for design perfection is still the cornerstone
of Global Bike’s corporate philosophy. Global Bike produces bikes for the most demanding
competitors—whether the competition is on pavement or dirt, for money, fame or just
bragging rights.

60
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI GBI

John Davis earned his racing scars in the mountain racing circuit in America, where he
won numerous downhill and cross-country championships. Early on, John realized that the
mass-produced bicycles available were inadequate in many ways for the type of racing he was
doing. So, John stripped four of his old bikes down to the bare metal and rebuilt them into
a single “Frankenstein” bike that he rode to win the national championship. Once news of
his Frankenstein bike got out, John’s friends and even his competitors began asking him to
build them a Frankenstein bike too. While recovering from an injury in 1990, John started
producing the first series of Frankenstein bikes in his garage—each one custom-built from
cannibalized parts from other bikes. As more and more orders came in, John successfully
expanded Frankenstein Bikes from his garage operations into a full-blown manufacturing
facility in Dallas and began producing custom trail bikes which he sold through a network
of specialized bike dealers throughout the country.

At nearly the same time, halfway around the world in Heidelberg, Germany, Peter Schwarz
was studying engineering and competing in regional touring races on weekends. In between
his races and studies, Peter worked at a bike shop in Heidelberg, fixing student bikes and
tuning the touring bikes that he and his friends rode for competitions. As Peter’s reputation
as a fierce competitor and mechanical wizard grew, he also began to design and build road
bikes based on an ultra-light composite frame that he had created for one of his engineering
courses. Peter’s innovative use of carbon composite materials allowed him to build a frame
that was significantly stronger and one tenth the weight of competing frames. As a student,
Peter did not have a great deal of financial resources, so he partnered with a local company
that manufactured his frame designs as a contract manufacturer. Soon, Peter’s frames were
being used by racers all over Europe and he started Heidelberg Composites to market and
design frames which would be fabricated by a contract manufacturer on a larger scale.
Heidelberg Composites sold its frames to specialized bike stores throughout Europe and
directly to racing teams, eventually becoming the leader in lightweight touring frames in
Europe.

Through a twist of fate, Peter and John met each other in 2000 and immediately recognized
their mutual passion for performance and complimentary business models. Each had been
looking for a partner in another racing field and each had been looking for a partner in a
different market. They quickly realized that a merger between their two companies would
be extremely synergistic and that the combination of their product lines and regional
distribution channels would generate a great deal of efficiencies.

So, in 2001, Heidelberg Composites and Frankenstein Bikes merged to form Global
Bike. Today, John and Peter share the responsibilities for managing Global Bike’s growing
organization as co-CEO’s. John is responsible for sales, marketing, service & support, IT,
finance and human resources groups and Peter is responsible for research, design, procurement
and manufacturing groups from an organizational reporting perspective.

61
channels would generate a great deal of efficiencies.
So, in 2001, Heidelberg Composites and Frankenstein Bikes merged to form Global Bike.
Today, John and Peter share the responsibilities for managing Global Bike’s growing
HANDS-ONorganization
WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI John is responsible for sales, marketing, service & GBI
as co-CEO’s. support, IT,
finance and human resources groups and Peter is responsible for research, design,
procurement and manufacturing groups from an organizational reporting perspective.

Board of
Directors

John (Co-CEO) Peter (Co-CEO)

Chief VP Research
Chief Financial VP Human
VP Marketing Information and VP Operations
Officer Resources
Officer Development

However, Global Bike is a process-centric organization, so John and Peter prefer to think of
the processes that they are responsible for, rather than the functional areas of the company
However,that report
Global to isthem.
Bike From this perspective,
a process-centric Peter
organization, soisJohn
responsible forprefer
and Peter Idea-to-Market
to think ofand Build-
to-Stock and John is responsible for Order-to-Cash and Service & Support, as well as the
the processes that they are responsible for, rather than the functional areas of the company
supporting services for all four key processes. The simple way to look at their responsibilities
that report to them.
would be toFrom
say this
that perspective,
Peter spendsPeter is responsible
money and buildsfor Idea-to-Market
products and Johnand Build-
sells products and
to-Stock and
bringsJohn is responsible for Order-to-Cash and Service & Support, as well as the
in money.
supporting services for all four key processes. The simple way to look at their responsibilities
would be to say that Peter spends money and builds products and John sells products and
brings in money.

58

62
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Carrying out a Complete ERP Process

PART 2: CARRYING OUT A


COMPLETE ERP PROCESS
8. Log on and the SAP S/4HANA interface
9. Accounts receivable
10. General Ledger administration
11. Accounts payable
12. Human resources
13. Logistic master data
14. Complete ERP process

This part describes a complete ERP process and constitutes the main part of this book. The
assignments in the chapters of this part are related to the Financial, Human Resources and
Logistics areas. In chapter 8 some basic terms are explained. Most exercises in chapters 9,
10, 11, 12 and 13 are about the creation of master data.

In chapter 14 the student performs a sales-order-driven process. By means of a materials


requirement planning (MRP I) all steps of a business cycle are gone through. The master
data of chapters 9, 10, 11, 12 and 13 are applied in carrying out the complete ERP process
in chapter 13.

63
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Log on and the SAP S/4HANA Interface

8 LOG ON AND THE SAP HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP

S/4HANA 8INTERFACE
LOG ON AND THE SAP S/4HANA
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP Process

8 LOG ON AND THE INTERFACE SAP S/4HANA


Log on to the S/4 GBI system with your browser, best use Google.

Your teacher INTERFACE


will provide a link. You need a client number and a user code like LEARN??? or
Log on to the S/4 GBI system with your browser, best use Google.
HvA-??? or something similar. The username ends in three digits (???), for example HVA-014.
This number, which is unique to Your
eachteacher
user, iswill provide
used a link. exercises.
in various You needFor a client number
example, and a user code li
there
Log on to the S/4 GBI system with your
or HvA-??? browser,
or something best use Google.
similar.
is a GL-Account with code 751???. The HVA-014 user enters the The usernameasends
GL-Account in three digits (???)
751014.
HVA-014.
Your teacher will provide a link. Thisa client
You need number, which
number andis aunique to each
user code user, is used in various
like LEARN???
example, there is a GL-Account with code 751???. The HVA-014 user e
Moreorinformation
HvA-??? or about
something similar. you
the interface The can
username
find onends in three
in any group.digits (???), for example
HVA-014. This number, which Account as 751014.
is unique to each user, is used in various exercises. For
example, there is a GL-Account with code 751???.
More information Theinterface
about the HVA-014 youuser
can enters
find onthe GL-group.
in any
ClickAccount
on the as
tile:
751014.
Click on the tile:
More information about the interface you can find on in any group.
Click on the tile:

And next:
And next:
And next:

Click on ‘Download’ to find more information about the interface.

Click on ‘Download’ to find more information about the interface.


Click on ‘Download’ to find more information about the interface.

64
HANDS-ON
HANDS-ON WITH WITH
SAP S/4 ANDSAP S/4
GBI AND GBI Part
Part 2 Carrying2out
Part Carrying
2 Carryingout
a Completea Complete
out ERP
a CompleteERP
Process
ERPProcess
Process
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI
HANDS-ON
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4WITH
ANDSAP
GBI S/4 AND GBI Part 2
Part 2 Carrying Carrying
out out a ERP
a Complete Complete ERP Process
Process
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP Process
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Receivable

9 ACCOUNTS
9 RECEIVABLE
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
In HANDS-ON
this chapter you become familiar
WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI In thiswith the you
chapter launchpad,
Part 2 Carrying become tiles and
familiar
out a Complete
somethe
ERP with
Process
of launchpad,
the icons and
tiles and some of
buttons of SAP S/4 by analyzing a customer balance.
buttons of SAP S/4 by analyzing a customer balance. The master data of a customer will be The master data of a
created. The integration between be accounts
created. receivable,
The integration
marketing between accounts
and physical receivable, marketing
distribution
is illustrated. distribution is illustrated.

Sometimes, depending on the size of your screen, you have to click on «More»
Sometimes, depending on the size of your screen, you have to click on «More
to see the choice in the menu bar.
see the choice in the menu bar.

To get back to the Launchpad, press the home button in the upper left corner.
To get back to the Launchpad, press the home button in the upper left co

9.1 CUSTOMER BALANCE


9.1‘Financial
Choose the following tile in group CUSTOMER BALANCE
Accounting’ to manage the customer line items:

Choose the following tile in group ‘Financial Accounting’ to manage the cust

Customer Fahrpott may have open items.


Customer Fahrpott may have open items.

Find the customer by clicking on to s


Find the customer by clicking on to search for the customer
customer number. A pop-up window appears. The ‘Search Term’ is ‘000’ and
number. A pop-up window appears.Name’Thegive‘Search
‘Fahr*’Term’ is ‘000’that
(this means andcustomers
as ‘Customer
with Name’
a name that starts w
give ‘Fahr*’ (this means that customers with a name that starts with Fahr and something
something
behind will be selected). Start the behind
search with will be selected).
«Go» Start the« search
. (The brackets withthe
» indicate «Go» . (Th
name of a button.) indicate the name of a button.)

Select the customer ‘Fahrpott’ and «OK» .


Select the customer ‘Fahrpott’ and «OK» .
The Company Code is DE00 and the Fiscal Year the <current year>. T

62

62 62
62
62 62

62

61

65
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Receivable

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP Process
The Company Code is DE00 and the Fiscal Year the <current year>. The balance is displayed
with «Go» .

Click on the blue debit amount. The customer line item is displayed.

Click on the blue document number in the column ‘Journal Entry’. Click again on the number.
The complete journal entry is displayed with «Back to Journal Entry»
(below right at the screen).

62 •
Analyze the financial posting. •

• Header: Who created this document? On which date?
• Line Items (3): Which G/L Accounts are posted?
• Tax (1): What is the VAT (tax) rate used?

Return to the launchpad with «Home» .

9.2 CUSTOMER MASTER DATA


In this section you create the customer’s master data. Create the master data for a German
customer: Bikeshop <your name>. This customer will play the role of a FI (Financial) and
commercial customer of the company Global Bike Germany GmbH. The customer will
buy bicycles from us.

A second business partner: an employee of this customer will be the contact person for this
customer. This role and relationship will be created.

66
customer: Bikeshop <your name>. This customer will play the role of a FI (Financial) and
commercial customer of the company9.2 Global
CUSTOMER Bike Germany
MASTERGmbH. DATA The customer will
buy bicycles from us.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA ANDIn this section you create the customer’sAccounts
GBI master data. Create the master data
Receivable
A second business partner: an employee
customer: Bikeshop <your name>. This customer willfor
of this customer will be the contact person play the role of a FI (
this customer. This role and relationship will be
commercial created.of the company Global Bike Germany GmbH. The
customer
buy bicycles from us.
A second business partner: an employee of this customer will be the conta
this customer. This role and relationship will be created.

Business Partner FI Customer


To create aPartner
Business customer,FIuse the app Maintain Business Partner in group ‘Financial Accounting’.
Customer
To create a customer, use the app Maintain Business Partner in group ‘Financial Accounting’.
Business Partner FI Customer
To create a customer, use the app Maintain Business Partner in group ‘Financial A

Click on «Organization» to create a new customer as a company.

Click on «Organization»
63
to create a new customer as a company.
Click on «Organization» toHANDS-ON
create WITH
a new customer
SAP S/4 AND GBI
as a company. Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP Proc

63

Business Partner <Leave blank>


Create in67
BP role FI Customer
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP Process

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Receivable

Business Partner <Leave blank>


HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP Process
Create in BP role FI Customer

Choose in the pop-up screen «Create» to create business partner in BP role ‘FI Customer’.

You create nowBusiness PartnerFirst the<Leave


two roles. blank> Partner (Gen.), the general data, the
role Business
Create
name of this role is in
notBPvisible,
role butFIyou
Customer
need this role when change the general data. is
information about the customer, that only dependent on the business partner, e.g. the name
or the Choose
address.in the pop-up screen «Create» to create business partner in BP role 'FI Customer'.

You create now two roles. First the role Business Partner (Gen.), the general data, the
Second the role FI Customer, the customer data as debtor for a company code. A customer
name of this role is not visible, but you need this role when change the general data. is
can be information
connected toabout
different subsidiaries
the customer, in only
that different countries.
dependent Thebusiness
on the FI Customer information
partner, e.g. the name
about the customer,
or the address. that only dependent on the business partner in combination with a
company code, e.g. the currency or the G/L account for the debtor.
Second the role FI Customer, the customer data as debtor for a company code. A
customer can be connected to different subsidiaries in different countries. The FI
Fields with a red information
Customer asterisk are about
mandatory. You canthat
the customer, use only
«F1»dependent
for help and «Possible
on the entries»
business / in
partner
for entry with
«F4» combination options. To do code,
a company this, position the cursor
e.g. the currency in the
or the G/Lfield concerned.
account for the debtor.

On theFields with a redenter


tab ‘Address’ asterisk are mandatory.
as the name ‘BikeshopYou can use name>’.
<your «F1» for Indicate
help and in«Possible entries»
the ‘Search
term 1\2’ the search
/ «F4» forterm
entry1 options.
‘<your name>’. Create
To do this, an address
position of the
the cursor company
in the in Germany:
field concerned.
street, house number, postal code of 5 digits and city. Ensure that the customer lives in
Germany On (DE)
the tabin‘Address’
order toenteravoid as export
the name ‘Bikeshopbecause
problems, <your the
name>’. Indicate
company in theBike
‘Global ‘Search
term 1\2’ the search term 1 ‘<your name>’. Create an address of the company in Germany:
Germany GmbH’ is located in Germany and in case your customer is not in Germany
street, house number, postal code of 5 digits and city. Ensure that the customer lives in
you have other taxes
Germany (DE)and you have
in order to enter
to avoid export
export information.
problems, In this
because the screen
company also‘Global
indicateBike
that communication
Germany GmbH’ withis this customer
located is taking
in Germany andplace in your
in case ‘Language’ English.
customer is notBear in mindyou
in Germany
that allhave
students
otherwill
taxesbeandable tohave
you retrieve this export
to enter data, soinformation.
use names or In descriptions
this screen alsoyour fellowthat
indicate
studentscommunication
and teacher iswith this customer
allowed to see! is taking place in ‘Language’ English. Bear in mind
that all students will be able to retrieve this data, so use names or descriptions your fellow
On thestudents and teacher
tab ‘Control’ state is allowed
that to see! has to pay full taxes in Germany:
this customer
On the tab ‘Control’ state that this customer has to pay full taxes in Germany:

Click on «Company Code» (if this button is not visible, widen your screen
or use «More» ) to create the customer as a debtor (FI is Finance) for the financial
organization unit:
Company Code DE00 (Global Bike Germany GmbH)
Give «Enter» to confirm. 65

68
On the tab ‘Customer: Account Management’:
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Receivable

Click on «Company Code» (if this button is not visible, widen your screen
or use «More» ) to create the customer as a debtor (FI is Finance) for the financial
organization unit:

Company Code DE00 (Global Bike Germany GmbH)


65
65

Give «Enter» to confirm.

On the tab ‘Customer: Account Management’:


HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP Process

Reconciliation acct 110000 (Trade Accounts receivables)

On the tab ‘Customer: Payment Transactions’:

Payment Terms 0003 (within 14 days 3%, 20 days 2%, 30 days Due net)

With «Save» at the bottom you can save the general data for this customer.

Write down the two numbers the system generated:

1. Number business partner in the role FI Customer.


2. Number Customer (middle of the screen under company code), this is the
debtor number in company DE00

Business Partner as Customer


Add the role ‘Customer’ to our Business Partner. Use the app Maintain Business Partner
in group ‘Financial Accounting’.

69
Write down2 the two numbers
Number the system
Customer generated:
(middle of the screen under company code), thi
1 number in
Number business company
partner DE00
in the role FI Customer.
2 Part
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Number
GBI out Customer
2 Carrying
(middle
a Complete ERP Process
of the screenAccounts
under company code), this is the de
Receivable
Business Partner as
number in company DE00 Customer
Add the role ‘Customer’ to our Business Partner. Use the app Maintain Business P
‘Financial Accounting’.
Business Partner as Customer
Add the role ‘Customer’ to our Business Partner. Use the app Maintain Business Partner in g
‘Financial Accounting’.

Find the business partner (organization) with:


Find the business partner (organization) with:
Find the business partner (organization) with:

Search with «start». Double-click on your business partner. Check the title

Search with «start». Double-click on ,your


whenbusiness
you are partner.
in a display mode,
Check the switch
title ofwith
the sc
Search with «start». Double-click on your business partner. Check the title of the screen,
HANDS-ON WITH SAPwhen youGBIare «Switch
S/4 AND Between
in a display Display
mode,
Part andwith
2switch Change»
Carrying out a Complete ERP Process
the organization. , when you are in a display mode, switch with
«Switch Between Display and Change»
Add theDisplay
role with: to the change
«Switch Between and Change» to the ch
the organization. Change in BP role Customer
the organization.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI
66

Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP Process

Add the role with: Add the role with:


Change in BP role Customer

Change in BP role Customer


65

Give «Enter». 65

Next choose «Sales and Distribution» . This brings up the tab pages
with data that is dependent on the customer/distribution channel combination. A customer
may buy bicycles from us for at the wholesale price, but if the customer buys a machine
for example, the industry price list applies.

70
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Receivable

Sales area:

Sales Org. DN00 (Germany North)

Distr. Channel WH (Wholesale)

Division BI (Bicycles)

Press «Enter» and at the tab ‘Orders’:

Sales district DE0001 (Northern Germany)

Customer Group 02 (Retail)

Sales office HH00 (Hamburg Sales off.)

Sales group DE (Sales Group Germany)

Currency EUR

Pricing/Statistics:

Price group 01 (Bulk buyer)

Cust.pric.proc. 1 (Standard)

Price list 01 (Wholesale)

At tab ‘Shipping’:

Delivery priority 02 (Normal)

Shipping conditions 01 (Standard)

71
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Receivable

At tab ‘Billing’:

Delivery and Payment Terms:

Incoterms CIF

Incoterms Location 1 city where customer is located

Payment terms 0003 (14 Days 3%, 20/2%, 30 net)

Accounting:

Acct Assmt Grp Cust. 01 (Domestic revenues)

Output Tax:

DE Germany MWST (Output Tax)

Tax classification 1 (Liable for Tax)

Save the customer using «Save». A message appears at the bottom of the screen showing
that the changes have been saved.

72
The other tabs do not need an entry, but check these.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Receivable

Save the customer using «Save». A message appears at the bottom of the sc
that the changes have been saved.
Business Partner Contact person
To create a contact person, use the app Maintain Business Partner.
Business Partner Contact person
To create a contact person, use the app Maintain Business Partner.

Click on «Person» to create a contact person at the company just created.


Click on «Person» to create a contact person at the company just created.
Business Partner Blank (number will be generated by the system)
Create in BP role Contact Person
Business Partner Blank (number will be generated by the system)
Choose in the pop-up screen «Create» to create business partner in BP
Create in BP role Person'.Contact Person
Enter a first name and last name <your name> as the name of the contact p
customer. The Correspondence language must be English. Indicate in the
1\2’ the
Choose in the pop-up screen «Create» to search term 1 ‘<your
create business partnername>’. The‘Contact
in BP role CountryPerson’.
is ‘DE’. «Save» the C
data and write down the number of this Contact Person.
Enter a first name and last name <your name> as the name of the contact person for this
customer. The Correspondence language must be English. Indicate in the ‘Search term 1\2’
the search term 1 ‘<your name>’. The Country is ‘DE’. «Save» the Contact Person data and
67
write down the number of this Contact Person.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND GBI Part 2 Carrying out a Complete ERP
Relation Business Partner and Contact person
To create a relation, use the app Maintain Business Partner.
Relation Business Partner and Contact person
To create a relation, use the app Maintain Business Partner.

Find the customer (not the contact person) with:

73
To create a relation, use the app Maintain Business Partner.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Receivable

Find the customer (not the contact person) with:


Find the customer (not the contact person) with:

Find the customer (not the contact person) with:

Search with «start». Click double on the business partner ‘Bikeshop <your name’. C
the title of the screen: when you are in a display mode, switch with «Switch Between D
Search with «start». Click double on the business partner ‘Bikeshop <your name’. Check the
title of the screen: whenand Change»
you are in a display mode, switch with «SwitchtoBetween
the change the data.
Display
and Change» to the change the data.
Search with «start». Click doubleNext on the business
choose partner ‘Bikeshop <your name’.
«Relationships» . Check
the title of the screen:
Next choose when you are in a display
«Relationships» mode,Cat.
Relationship switch
. with
Has«Switch Between Display
Contact Person
and Change» Relationship to to BP <number
the change Contact Person>
the data.
OR
Relationship Cat. Has Contact Person
find with «Possible entries»:
Next choose «Relationships» .
Relationship to BP <number Contact Person>
Relationship Cat. Has Contact Person OR
Relationship to BP <number Contact Person> find with «Possible entries»:
OR
find with «Possible entries»:
HANDS-ON WITH
HANDS-ON WITH SAP
SAP S/4
S/4 AND
AND GBI
GBI Part 2
Part 2 Carrying
Carrying out
out a
a Complete
Complete ERP
ERP Process
Process

«Find» and select the right person with double click or «Copy» .

69 69

«Find» and select the right person with double click or «Copy» . 68

«Find» and select the right person with double click or «Copy» .

With «Create» ( middle of the screen) the relation is created. Confirm the data
in the pop-screen with «Continue(Enter)».
68
«Save» this relation.

You will continue to work with this customer in chapter 14. Should you have entered
anything you would like to change, find your customer and choose the BP role you like
to change.

74
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI General Ledger Administration

10 GENERAL LEDGER
ADMINISTRATION
In this chapter a general ledger HANDS-ON
accountWITH
is created, and a balance sheet and profit and loss general ledger ad
SAP ERP AND IDES
statement are generated for the GBI company in Germany.

10 GENERAL LEDGER ADMINISTRATI


10.1 GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT
In this MASTER
chapter a general ledger DATA
account is created, and a balance sheet an
statement
A Chart of Accounts consists of all are generated
ledger account for the
numbers. GBI company
A particular in Germany.
subsidiary company
activates a selection of ledger accounts from the Chart of Accounts to use at the specific
10.1 GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT MASTER DATA
company code. A Chart of Accounts is generally established for all subsidiary companies
on a country- by-country basis.A Chart of Accounts consists of all ledger account numbers. A particular su
activates a selection of ledger accounts from the Chart of Accounts to u
The financial administrator has company
determined code.
thatA no
Chart of Accounts
account is generally
for purchased established
services exits infor all subsidiar
country- by-country basis.
the Chart of Accounts. The account does not yet exist in chart of accounts GL00 (GBI
Thethe
Global), nor has it been created for financial
company administrator
code DE00has determined
(Global that no account
Bike Germany GmbH)for purchased se
Chart of
concerned. You will therefore create Accounts.
account numberThe 751???
accountasdoescopynot yet exist
from in chart
741900. (Theof accounts GL
username ends with three digitsnor hasThis
(???). it been created
number, whichforis the company
unique to eachcode
user,DE00
is used(Global Bike G
concerned. You will therefore create account number 751??? as copy fr
in various exercises. For example the user HVA-014 enters the GL-Account as 751014.)
username ends with three digits (???). This number, which is unique to eac
various exercises. For example the user HVA-014 enters the GL-Account as
In group ‘Financial Accounting’ use:
In group ‘Financial Accounting’ use:

The Chart of accounts is GL00 and select G/L Account type P (Primary C
The Chart of accounts is GL00 With «Go»G/L
and select you get a list oftype
Account G/LP accounts.
(Primary Click
Costson
or the number 741900.
Revenue).
«Copy»
With «Go» you get a list of G/L or «Multiple
accounts. Click onCopies» this number
the blue account to number 751??? , as description in E
741900.
Services ???’ and select as Company Code Assignment only DE00
others and click «OK». With «Save» the new G/L account is created.

Edit the master data for this new G/L account in group ‘Financial Accounting

75
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI General Ledger Administration

The Chart of accounts is GL00 and select G/L Account type P (Primary C
«Copy» or «Multiple Copies» this Withaccount
«Go» you toget
number
a list of751??? , as description
G/L accounts. Click on in
theEnglish
number 741900.
‘Purch. Services ???’ and select as«Copy» or «Multiple Copies» this account to number 751??? , as
Company Code Assignment only DE00 so description in E
deselect the others and click «OK». With «Save» the new G/L account is created.
Services ???’ and select as Company Code Assignment only DE00
others and click «OK». With «Save» the new G/L account is created.
Edit the master data for this new G/L account in group ‘Financial Accounting’ with:
Edit the master data for this new G/L account in group ‘Financial Accounting

71

Enter in the selection field G/L Account: 751??? and «Go». Click on the blue n
70
Enter in the selection field G/L Account: 751??? and «Go». Click on the blue number 751???
in the first column and «Edit».

The G/L Account Long Text is ‘Purchased Services ???’.

The German (DE) translation must be as short text ‘Bezogene Leist. ???’ and as long text
‘Bezogene Leistungen ???’. «Save» the G/L account master data.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES general ledger ad


10.2 BALANCE SHEET AND PROFIT AND LOSS STATEMENT
It is possible to have the system generate a profit and loss statement at any time. The
10.2 BALANCE SHEET AND PROFIT AND LOSS STATEMENT
structure can be freely determined by means of customizing.
It is possible to have the system generate a profit and loss statement at any ti
can be freely determined by means of customizing.
Take a look at the results of the GBI company in Germany of this year and compare these
results with the results of the year
Takebefore
a lookbyatchoosing in of
the results group ‘Financial
the GBI Accounting’:
company in Germany of this year an
results with the results of the year before by choosing in group ‘Financial A

Select:
76
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI General Ledger Administration

Select:

Company code DE00

Ledger 0L

Financial statement version G000

Statement Type Normal (Actual – Actual)

End Period 12 [This year]

Comparison End Period 12 [Last year]

Currency EUR

Press «Go». With you can expand a node. Open the nodes ‘PROFIT & LOSS STATEMENT’,
‘Revenue’ and finally ‘Sales revenue’ to find the revenues for this year.

Since this is an overview, you don’t have to save.

73

77
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Payable

11 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Accounts Payable

In this chapter the following actions will take place. The vendor master data is created. The

11 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
invoice process is started. The invoice for consultancy costs is posted. The outcome of this
posting will be analyzed with the balance vendor account and the open items. Finally, the
payment of the invoice is posted.
In this chapter the following actions will take place. The vendor master data is created. The
invoice process is started. The invoice for consultancy costs is posted. The outcome of this
posting will be analyzed with the balance vendor account and the open items. Finally, the
payment of the invoice is posted.
11.1 INVOICE PROCESSING C-BUSINESS DIAGRAM
11.1 INVOICE diagram
This C-Business PROCESSING C-BUSINESS
(see paragraph DIAGRAM
6.2) depicts the collaboration of the company with
the outside
This business
C-Business environment
diagram and the6.2)
(see paragraph collaboration
depicts thebetween the departments.
collaboration The order
of the company with
of the process flow is top down. The invoice is created as collaboration between
the outside business environment and the collaboration between the departments. The order the supplier
of
andthethe
process flow is department.
accounting top down. TheThisinvoice is created
invoice as collaboration
does not between
contain logistical the supplier
information. In
and the accounting department. This invoice does not contain logistical information.
chapter 14 an invoice is created with reference to a purchase order, 3-way matching. Within In
chapter 14 an invoice
the accounting is created
department thewith reference
creditors to a purchase
monitoring order,
(credit 3-wayismatching.
control) Within
carried out. the
Finally
accounting department the creditors monitoring (credit control) is carried out. Finally you post
you post the outgoing payment.
the outgoing payment.

Figure 11.1
Figure 11.1Invoice processing
Invoice processing

11.2 VENDOR MASTER DATA


11.2 VENDOR MASTER DATA
The structure of the vendor is similar to the customer.
The structure of the vendor is similar to the customer.

78
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Payable
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Accoun

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES A

Business Partner FI Vendor


To make a start with accounts payable you first need to create a vendor as follow
Business Partner FI Vendor
app from group ‘Materials Management’:
Business
To make a start with accounts payable Partner
you FI Vendor
first need to create a vendor as follows with the
To make a start with accounts payable you first need to create a vendor as f
app from group ‘Materials Management’:
app from group ‘Materials Management’:

Click on «Organization» to create a new vendor as a company.

Click on «Organization» to create a new vendor as a company.


Click on «Organization» to create a new vendor as a company.
Business Partner <Leave blank>
Create in BP role FI Vendor
Choose in the Business
pop-upPartner
screen «Create» to blank>
<Leave create business partner in BP role 'FI
means Finance, so the vendor will also be created as a creditor.
Create in BP role FI Vendor
On the tab ‘ Address’ enter as the name ‘Supplier <your name>’. Indicate in the «
Choose in the pop-up screen «Create» to create business partner in BP ro
1\2» the search term ‘<your name>’. Create an address of the company in Germ
means Finance, so the vendor will also be created as a creditor.
street, house number,
79 postal code of 5 digits and city. Ensure that the vendor lives
On the tab ‘ Address’ enter as the name ‘Supplier
74
<your name>’. Indicate in
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Payable

Click on «Organization» to create a new vendor as a company.

Business Partner <Leave blank>


Business Partner Create
<Leavein BP role
blank> FI Vendor

Create in BP role Choose inFIthe pop-up screen «Create» to create business partner in BP role 'F
Vendor
means Finance, so the vendor will also be created as a creditor.
On the tab ‘ Address’ enter as the name ‘Supplier <your name>’. Indicate in th
Choose in the pop-up screen1\2» the search
«Create» termbusiness
to create ‘<your partner
name>’.inCreate an address
BP role of theFIcompany in Ger
‘FI Vendor’.
street,
means Finance, so the vendor will house
also benumber,
createdpostal code of 5 digits and city. Ensure that the vendor liv
as a creditor.
74

On the tab ‘ Address’ enter as the name ‘Supplier <your name>’. Indicate in the «Search
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Accounts
term 1\2» the search term ‘<your name>’. Create an address of the company in Germany.
Payable
Enter a street, house number, postal code of 5 digits and city. Ensure that the vendor lives
in Germany (DE) in order to avoid all kinds of import problems, e.g. tax data and legal
data, the company Global Bike Germany GmbH’ is in Germany. In this screen also indicate
that communication with this vendor is taking place in English.

At tab ‘Vendor: Tax Data’ scroll down and enter as TC (Tax Category) ‘IVA’ (Purchase VAT).

Click on «Company Code» to create the vendor as creditor for the financial
organization unit:

Company Code DE00 (Global Bike Germany GmbH)

Give «Enter» to confirm.

On the tab ‘Vendor: Account Management’:

Reconciliation acct 300000 (Payables-Trade Accounts)

On the tab ‘Vendor: Payment Transactions’:

Payment Terms 0003 (within 14 days 3%, 20 days 2%, 30 days Due net)

80
organization unit:
Click on «Company Code»Company Code DE00 (Global the
to create Bikevendor
GermanyasGmbH)
creditor for the fin
organization unit:
Give «Enter» to confirm.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI
Company Code DE00 (Global Bike GermanyAccountsGmbH) Payable
On the tab ‘Vendor: Account Management’:
Give «Enter» to confirm.
Reconciliation acct 300000 (Payables-Trade Accounts)
With «Save» at the bottom you can save the
On the tab ‘Vendor: Account Management’:general data for this vendor.
On the tab ‘Vendor: Payment Transactions’:
Reconciliation acct 300000 (Payables-Trade Accounts)
Payment Terms 0003 (within 14 days 3%, 20 days 2%, 30 days Due n
Write down the number the system generated for this vendor.
On the tab ‘Vendor: Payment Transactions’:
Payment
WithTerms
«Save» 0003 (within
at the 14 daysyou
bottom 3%,can
20 save
days 2%, 30 days Due
the general datanet)
for this ven
Write down the number the system generated for this vendor.
With «Save» at the bottom you can save the general data for this vendor.
Business Partner as Vendor
Write downBusiness Partner
the number as Vendor
the system generated for this vendor.
Add the role ‘Vendor Purchase’ to your Business Partner from group ‘Materials Management’:
Add the role ‘Vendor Purchase’ to your Business Partner from group ‘Material
Business Partner as Vendor
Add the role ‘Vendor Purchase’ to your Business Partner from group ‘Materials Managem

Find the FI Vendor with:


Find the FI Vendor with:
Find the FI Vendor with:

76

Search with «start». Click double on your vendor (supplier) as partner. Check
the Organization in the title of the screen. When you are in a display mode, sw
Search with Between
«start». Click double
Display andon your vendor (supplier) as partner. Check you are
Change» cha
to the
the Organization in the title of the screen. When you are in a display mode, switch with «S
Search withHANDS-ON
«start». Click Change
double
WITH SAP ERP ANDoninIDES
BP role
your vendorVendor Purchase
(supplier) as partner. Check you are
Accounts
Betweenin
changing the Organization Display andof
the title Change»
the screen. When you are in a display mode, to the change the d
Payable
75
switch with «Switch Change in BP
Between role and
Display Vendor Purchase
Change» to
the changeWITH
HANDS-ON the SAP
data.ERP AND IDES Accounts
75
Payable

Change in BP role Vendor Purchase

Next choose «Purchasing» . The Purch. organization is ‘DE00’.

81
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Accounts
Payable

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Payable

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES A


After «Enter» at the tab ‘Purchasing Data’ enter the order currency EUR and as payment
terms again 0003. Scroll down and enter at ‘Additional Purchasing Data’ a check mark at
Next
‘Automatic PO (purchase order)’. choose
«Save» «Purchasing»
the role . TheBusiness
Vendor Purchase for this Purch. organization
Partner. is ‘DE00’.
After «Enter» at the tab ‘Purchasing Data’ enter the order currency EUR and
again 0003. Scroll down and enter a check mark at ‘Automatic PO (
«Save» the role Vendor Purchase for this Business Partner.

11.3 POST THE INVOICE


An invoice is received from the 11.3
vendor POST THEcreated.
you just INVOICEThe total invoice amount is € 250
relating to a notification that has been received regarding advice on the color scheme of a
An invoice is received from the vendor you just created. The total invoice
bicycle. Often invoice postings relating
are related
to atonotification
purchase orders.
that hasThis
been invoice willregarding
received be postedadvice on the c
directly into accounts payable inbicycle.
group Often
‘ Financial Accounting’
invoice via:related to purchase orders. This invoi
postings are
directly into accounts payable in group ‘ Financial Accounting’ via:

You work for company DE00 (Global Bike Germany GmbH). If nece
You work for company DE00 company code with
(Global Bike «Company
Germany Code».
GmbH). If necessary change the
company code with «Company Code».
The vendor is the vendor you created with name Supplier <your name>.
The vendor is the vendor you created
vendor with
with nameandSupplier
search<your name>.at You
the vender the can find the (General)’ b
tab ‘Suppliers
vendor with and search the<your
vender at the Double
name>. tab ‘Suppliers
click on(General)’ by you
the supplier the just
search term
created.
<your name>. Double click on the supplier you just created.
For the Invoice date and Posting date, enter the current date. It is suffi
For the Invoice date and Posting entering
date, 24.05.2020, to enter
enter the current 240520
date. It is or use «F4»instead
sufficient, (Entry of
options).
Enter the amount 250. For the currency select EUR. This amount is inclu
entering 24.05.2020, to enter 240520 or use «F4» (Entry options).
calculate tax (check box). Enter V1 (19% domestic input tax) as the tax cod
The document header text (Text) is ‘Consultancy and advertisement ???’.
Enter the amount 250. For the currency select EUR. This amount is including tax. Activate
calculate tax (check box). EnterMake
V1 (19%
sure domestic input tax)
at the ‘Payment’ tabasthat
the the
tax code.
payment term is 0003, the res
conditions will be completed automatically.
The document header text (Text) is ‘Consultancy and advertisement ???’.
The offsetting G/L accounts are entered as ‘Items’. Enter account 751??? as
Make sure at the ‘Payment’ tabaccount.
that theDouble
paymentclickterm
on the line. Enter
is 0003, €100ofasthe
the rest amount (Amount in doc.c
payment
EUMK1000 (Marketing Costs) and the text for this item is ‘Consultancy
conditions will be completed automatically.
«Back» to the overview.

Create a second
77
item for advertisements cost. The general ledger account
741900 (Advertising Expense). Double click on the line item. Enter for €15
Cost Center EUSA1000 (Sales Costs) and the text ‘Advertisement ???’ for
82
with «Back» twice to the overview.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Payable

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Accounts


The offsetting G/L accounts are entered as ‘Items’. Enter account 751??? asPayable
the general
ledger account. Double click on the line. Enter €100 as amount (Amount in doc.curr.),
Accounts
Payable
Cost Center EUMK1000 (Marketing Costs) and the text for this item is ‘Consultancy ???’.
Go with «Back» to the overview.

Create a second item for advertisements cost. The general ledger account for these costs is
741900 (Advertising Expense). Double click on the line item. Enter for €150 as amount,
the Cost Center EUSA1000 (Sales Costs) and the text ‘Advertisement ???’ for this item.
Return with «Back» twice to the overview.

Click on the tab ‘Details’ and add the Header Text ‘Consult. and advert. ???’ as. Using texts
facilitates the control of postings.

The posting can be simulated, click the «Simulate» button. This list contains the ledger
accounts to be posted. By double clicking on the vendor number, the general ledger account
(300000) appears. This account will be posted automatically. This is the integration of the
accounts payable and the general ledger administration. Return to the overview with the
button «Back».

The account balances and can be saved, click on «Post» . Do not use the button «Park»
or «Complete», the invoice will not be posted, but will appear in the mailbox of another
employee to approve the invoice. Write down the number in the C-Business diagram.

The system expects the entry of a new invoice for posting. Leaving this screen is therefore
only possible using «Home» and ,when asked click ‘OK’ to the question whether you
really want to leave.

11.4 MONITORING THE ACCOUNTS PAYABLE


With accounts payable monitoring you can check whether all accounts are paid on time.

Select in group ‘Financial Accounting’:

83
11.4 MONITORING THE ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA ANDWith
GBI accounts payable monitoring you canAccounts
check whether all accounts are p
Payable

Select in group ‘Financial Accounting’:

Enter the vendor number you created with name Supplier <your name>.

vendor with and search the vender at the tab ‘Suppliers (General) by the s
Enter the vendor number you created
name>.with
The name Supplier
Company Code<your name>.
is DE00 YouFiscal
and the can Year
find the
is the [Current Ye
vendor with and search thedisplayed
vender at the tab
with «Go».‘Suppliers (General) by the search term
<your name>. The Company Code is DE00 and the Fiscal Year is the [Current Year].The
balance is displayed with «Go». Click on an amount (for instance the amount entered in the previous paragr
covering the current period (month).
Click on an amount (for instance the amount 78 entered in the previous paragraph) in the
Click on the blue number in the column Journal Entry and again on the num
line covering the current period (month).
from the item are displayed. With «Back to Journal Entry» the overview with
listed.
Click on the blue number in the column Journal Entry and again on the number. The
details from the item are displayed. With «Back to Journal Entry» the overview with all
line items are listed.

77
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
11.5 PAYMENT TO A VENDOR
11.5 PAYMENT TO A VENDOR
The outgoing payment by the is bank is done. Post the outgoing payment from the Bank
(ledger number 100000) with aThe outgoingofpayment
deduction 3% cashbydiscount.
the is bank is done.
Use Post‘Financial
in group the outgoing payment fr
Accounting’: (ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in grou
Accounting’:

The company code is DE00. For the Posting Date, Journal Entry Date and
today’s date. The Bank Data G/L account requested is 100000. The amoun
minus 3% discount). The currency is EUR. Open items selection with Acco
and for Account ID enter <your name> and double click on the right supp
items» the open items for this supplier are displayed.
84
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Accounts Payable

The company code is DE00. For the Posting Date, Journal Entry Date and Value Date
enter today’s date. The Bank Data G/L account requested is 100000. The amount €242,50
(€250 minus 3% discount). The currency is EUR. Open items selection with Account type
‘Supplier’ and for Account ID enter <your name> and double click on the right supplier.
With «Show items» the open items for this supplier are displayed.

Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».

Check the balance at the right top of the screen. It should be zero in green. Check the
discount with «Simulate» . «Post» the payment. Make a note of the posting number in the
C-Business diagram.

Verify the posting by displaying the vendor account balance as done in the previous paragraph!

85
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Human Resources

12 HUMAN RESOURCES
You create
HANDS-ON WITHaSAP
position
ERP AND IDESfor a sales employee. You will hire yourself as Accounts
the new employee for
Payable

this position.

12 HUMAN RESOURCES
You create a position for a sales employee. You will hire yourself as the new employee for this
12.1 POSITION
position.
A position can be filled by one or more persons. A position belongs to an organizational
12.1 POSITION
unit and is described by a job.
A position can be filled by one or more persons. A position belongs to an organizational
unit and is described by a job.
An example from a Business school: your SAP lecturer occupies the position of ‘Business
informatics
An example lecturer 1’, described
from a Business school: by
yourthe
SAPjob ‘lecturer’
lecturer and the
occupies belongs
positiontoofthe department
‘Business
‘International Business’.
informatics lecturer 1’, described by the job ‘lecturer’ and belongs to the department
‘International Business’.

Figure
Figure12.1 Position
12.1 Position

Create aa new
Create newposition
positionforfor
a sales employee
a sales in group
employee ‘Human
in group Capital Capital
‘Human Management’ via:
Management’ via:

86
Click on the upper left window on in front of ‘Position’. Click on ‘Structure search’.
Figure 12.1 Position
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Human Resources

Create a new position for a sales employee in group ‘Human Capital Manag

HANDS-ON
HANDS-ON WITH
WITH SAP
SAP ERP
ERP AND
AND IDES
IDES Accounts
Accounts
HANDS-ON WITH SAP
HANDS-ON ERP
WITH AND
SAP ERP Click
IDES
AND on
IDES the upper left window on in front of ‘Position’.
Accounts
Payable
Payable Accounts Click on ‘Structur
Payable
79
94 Payable
Click on the upper left window on
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
in front of ‘Position’. Click on ‘Structure search’.
Accounts
Payable
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Accounts
Click WITH
HANDS-ON in the
SAP lower
ERP AND left
IDES windowon before ‘Global Bike Group’ to display the structure
Payable
Accounts of
Payable

the company. Next open with ‘Global Bike Germany’. Next ‘Marketing and Sales’ and
Click
nextin‘Sales’.
the lower left double
Finally windowclick
on onbefore
‘Sales ‘Global Bike Group’ to display the structure of
Area NL’.
the company. Next open with ‘Global Bike Germany’. Next ‘Marketing and Sales’ and next
‘Sales’.
CheckFinally
with double click
in theonright
‘Saleswindow
Area NL’.
if ‘Staff Assignments (structure)’ is selected.

The ID becomes visible by clicking on the «Column Configuration» and activating


Check with in the right window if ‘Staff Assignments (structure)’ is selected.
the ID marker and «Continue».
The ID becomes visible by clicking on the «Column Configuration» and activating the
IDClick
markeronand
the«Continue».
department ‘Sales Area NL’ in the upper right window, to work with this
Click on the
object. Withdepartment ‘Sales
the button Area NL’ in the
«Create» upper right
a pop-up windowwindow, to work
‘Choose with this object.
relationship’ appears.
Choose ‘Incorporates position’. In case the message ‘Sales Area NL is locked by…’ appears,
With the student
another button «Create» a pop-up
is adding a position. window
Wait a while‘Choose relationship’
and repeat this action. appears. Choose
‘Incorporates position’. In case the message ‘Sales Area NL is locked by…’ appears, another
student is adding a position. Wait a while and repeat this action.
In the right lower window change the short description of the position from ‘New position’
Intothe
‘Sales???’ and window
right lower next to itchange
add a the
long description
short ‘Sales
description of employee
the position???’.
from ‘New position’
to ‘Sales???’ and next to it add a long description ‘Sales employee ???’.

«Save» the position and write down the number (ID), without the ‘S’, for this position.
Sometimes you have to scroll in the upper right window to find your position.
«Save» the position and write down the number (ID), without the ‘S’, for this position.
12.2 HIRING
Sometimes youA have
NEWtoEMPLOYEE
scroll in the upper right window to find your position.
Enter yourself as a new member of staff who is going to take up the position you created in
group ‘Human Capital Management’ via:

87
In the right lower window change the short description of the position fro
to ‘Sales???’ and next to it add a long description ‘Sales employee ???’.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Human Resources


«Save» the position and write down the number (ID), without the ‘S’,
Sometimes you have to scroll in the upper right window to find your positio
12.2 HIRING A NEW EMPLOYEE
12.2 HIRING A NEW EMPLOYEE
Enter yourself as a new member of staff who is going to take up the position you created
Enter yourself
in group ‘Human Capital Management’ via: as a new member of staff who is going to take up the posi
group ‘Human Capital Management’ via:

In this screen fill under ‘From’ the current date (leave the personnel numbe

Select
In this screen fill under ‘From’ the the action
current date ‘Hiring’ and: blank).
(leave the personnel number

Personnel area NL00 (GBI Amsterdam)


Select the action ‘Hiring’ and:
EE group 1 (Active)
EE subgroup NB (Monthly employee)
Personnel area NL00 (GBI Amsterdam)
Click on the «Execute».
EE group 1 (Active)
In the following screen enter the number (ID) of the position you create
EE subgroup NB (Monthly employee)
section as ‘Position’ (can be searched by the search term ‘*???’). «Save» the
information and «Continue(Enter)».

81
Click on the «Execute». 80

In the following screen enter the number (ID) of the position you created in the previous
section as ‘Position’ (can be searched by the search term ‘*???’). «Save» these data. Read the
information and «Continue(Enter)».

The next screen is the ‘Personal data’ screen. Enter your title, last (birth) name, initials and
first name.

The ‘CSN [BSN]’ must be a 9-digit number, you can find one on www.testnummers.nl or
type a number and change the last digit to get an allowed BSN-number.

Enter a ‘Birth date’ and give your ‘Nationality’. State that you are ‘single’ and without
children to prevent triggering data about your partner and kids. «Save» these data as well.

88
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Human Resources

The ‘Organizational assignment’ is complete if the position field is filled. «Save» the input.
If a warning pops up about the payroll, it can be ignored with «Enter». A pop-up menu
appears with ‘Delimit vacancy’, enter the current date. Confirm the delimitation with «Yes
(Enter)».

The address type is ‘Permanent residence’ and enter an address in The Netherlands and «Save»

There is no need for any changes into the ‘Planned working time’ screen and you can have
it checked by pressing «Enter». If a warning pops up about the payroll, it can be ignored
with «Enter». «Save» the planned working time.

The ‘Basic Pay’ screen depends on the position you have chosen. At pay scale:

Type 10 (Bedrijfs-CAO)

Area 10 (Nederland)

Group L02

Level 1

The amount is found with «Enter». If a warning pops up about the payroll, it can be ignored
with «Enter». «Save» the ‘Basic Pay’.

The bank details need to be entered:

City <your residence>

Bank Country Nederlands

Bank Key ING

Bank Account ???

If a warning pops up about the payroll, it can be ignored with «Enter». «Save» the bank
details.

There is no need for any changes into the ‘Fiscal Data NL’ screen and you can have it
checked by pressing «Enter» and then «Save» it.

89
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Human Resources

There is no need for any changes into the ‘Social Insurance NL’ screen and you can have it
checked by pressing «Enter», ignore the message about the legal person and then «Save» it.

There is no need for any changes into the ‘Pensions NL’ screen and you can have it checked
by pressing «Enter», ignore the message about the legal person and then «Save» it.

In the ‘Contract Elements’ screen, the payment period from beginning of illness should
be changed to ‘Continued Pay’ 1 year and no ‘Sick Pay Supplement’. In this infotype the
probationary period is created, as well as the ER (EmployeR) and EE (EmployeE) notice
period. Check the data with «Enter» and then «Save» it.

Since you entered a probationary period, an evaluation of this period should be planned.
Check the ‘Monitoring of Tasks’HANDS-ON
with «Enter» and
WITH SAP ERP ANDthen
IDES «Save» it. A

Since
The ‘Leave Entitlement’ will be you entered a part
a proportional probationary
of the 25period,
days an
perevaluation of this
year, since the period should
Check the ‘Monitoring of Tasks’ with «Enter»
employee is not hired on January 1st . Confirm with «Enter» and «Save». and then «Save» it.

The ‘Leave Entitlement’ will be a proportional part of the 25 days per year,
The ‘CBS NL’ can be checked «Enter» and on
is not hired then «Save»
January 1 stit.
. Confirm with «Enter» and «Save».

The ‘CBS
Finally the ‘Wage Return’: change NL’ can
the ‘CAO be checked
Code’ to 487«Enter» and then
(Metalekro v/h «Save»
metaal-it.en
elektrotechn. industrie) and the ‘F&S Phase Cat. Code’ must be blank. Confirm with
Finally the ‘Wage Return’: change the ‘CAO Code’ to 487 (Metalekro v/h m
«Enter» and «Save».
elektrotechn. industrie) and the ‘F&S Phase Cat. Code’ must be blank. Conf
«Enter» and «Save».
The new member of staff has been created and by choosing:
The new member of staff has been created and by choosing:

Open the same windows as in 12.1. You can see that you have become the hold
Open the same windows as in position youcan
12.1. You have
seejust created.
that To change
you have becomeor add
the aholder
group of
of the
data, infotype,use:
position you have just created. To change or add a group of data, infotype,use:

90
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Human Resources

Open the same windows as in 12.1. You can see that you have become the hold
position you have just created. To change or add a group of data, infotype,use:

In case the ‘Personnel no.’ is blank, find the employee you created by last na
Give find
In case the ‘Personnel no.’ is blank, «Enter».
the employee you created by last name.
The created infotypes are marked with a green checkmark. These can be ch
and ‘HR master data’ -> ‘Maintain’.
Give «Enter». You can «Change» an infotype and missing infotypes be created with «Creat

The created infotypes are marked with a green checkmark. These can be changed with
«More» and ‘HR master data’ -> ‘Maintain’.

You can «Change» an infotype and missing infotypes be created with «Create».

82

91
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

13 LOGISTIC MASTER DATA


To enable a complete ERP process: from purchasing, inventory and production to sales, the
master data for the materials, the master data for the production (bill of material, direct
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES log
wage hours and machine hours, work center and routing) and the purchasing (info record)
are to be created.

13 LOGISTIC MASTER DATA


To enable a complete ERP process: from purchasing, inventory and prod
13.1 MASTER DATA FOR THE MATERIALS
master data for the materials, the master data for the production (bill of m
hours and
The bicycle will be created as a finished machine
product. hours,
The viewswork
youcenter and routing)
will create and the purchasing (inf
will determine
created.
the characteristics of a material for sales, planning (MRP), inventory and accounting. The
components, frame and wheels, are created as raw materials. Within SAP S/4 it is possible
to manage the inventory with or13.1 MASTER
without DATAmanagement.
warehouse FOR THE MATERIALS
To illustrate this, the
fames and wheels are using the fullThewarehouse
bicycle willfunctionality.
be created as a finished product. The views you will create
characteristics of a material for sales, planning (MRP), inventory and
components, frame and wheels, are created as raw materials. Within SAP S
manage the inventory with or without warehouse management. To illustrat
wheels are using the full warehouse functionality.
13.1.1 SPECIAL BICYCLE

Go to the screen for setting up13.1.1 SpecialaBicycle


a material, special bicycle, use in group ‘Materials
Management’ the app:
Go to the screen for setting up a material, a special bicycle, use in group ‘Ma
the app:

The material (code) that needs to be entered is SB???. Once you are in the
The material (code) that needs tobox, scroll tois‘Mechanical
be entered SB???. Onceengineering’. The‘Industry
you are in the material type is ‘Finished Prod
sector’
box, scroll to ‘Mechanical engineering’. The material type is ‘Finished Product’.
Click «Continue (Enter)». Select the following views:
Click «Continue (Enter)». Select the following views:
• Basic Data 1
• Basic Data 2
• Basic Data 1 • Sales: Sales Org. Data 1
• Basic Data 2 • Sales: Sales Org. Data 2
• Sales: General/Plant Data
• Sales Text
• MRP 1
• MRP 92 2
• MRP 3
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

• Sales: Sales Org. Data 1


• Sales: Sales Org. Data 2
• Sales: General/Plant Data
• Sales Text
• MRP 1
• MRP 2
• MRP 3
• MRP 4
HANDS-ON WITH Scheduling
• Work SAP ERP AND IDES logistic master
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES data
logistic master
• General Plant Data/Storage 1 data

• General Plant Data/Storage 2


• Warehouse Management 1
• Warehouse Management 2
• Accounting 1
• Accounting 2
• Costing 1
• Costing 2.

Finally select

Click on the «Continue (Enter)» button. This opens the ‘Organizational levels’ screen.

Enter the following:

Plant HD00

Stor. Location FG00

Sales org. DN00

Distr. channel WH

Warehouse No. 100

Storage Type 001

Again press «Continue (Enter)».

Many views contain required fields. An automatic check is made to make sure that all
required fields have been filled in before you leave a view. All other fields then turn grey,
i.e. they cannot be changed and the required field remains white. The required field must

93
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

be filled before the material can be released. The purpose of this method is to prevent
incomplete data for materials – meaning not all required fields are filled – being added to
the material master.

The ‘Basic data’ are data that are exclusively dependent on the material.

Basic data 1
Make up your own description in the field under the material, to make clear this bicycle
is created by you.

Basic unit of measure PC Gross

weight 22

Weight unit KG

Net weight 20

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Basic data 2
No data need to be entered in the ‘Basic data 2’ screen. Go to the next tab with «Enter».

The sales data is determined according to the sales channel.

Sales: Sales org. 1 data

Division BI (Bicycles)

Delivering Plant HD00

Tax classification 1 (Full tax)

94
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

Click on the button «Conditions» in the middle of the screen. At scales you enter the normal
sales price €1.045,- per piece and if you buy five or more bicycles a lower price €995,-.

‘from’ 1 PC 1045 EUR 1 PC

5 995

Return with «Back» to ‘Sales org Data.1 data’. Go to the next tab with «Enter» or
clicking on the next chosen tab (this is not repeated at each view).

Sales: Sales org. 2 data

Material Price Grp 01 (Normal)

Acct Assmt Grp Mat. 03 (Finished Products)

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Sales: general/plant
Here the delivery details relating to the material for a particular branch are specified.

87
Availability check 01 87 (Daily requirements)

Trans. Grp 0001 (On palettes)

LoadingGrp 0002 (Hand lift)

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

95
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

Sales text
This is the text that will be on the invoice and it must therefore be in the language you use
to communicate with these customers. You will see it on the invoice to the customer. In
the case of this customer, you have already indicated that communications will take place
in English. Enter an English language sales text here. Click outside the textbox and go to
the next tab with «Enter».

MRP 1

MRP type PD

MRP controller 000

Lot Sizing Procedure TB

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

MRP 2

In-house production <blank>

Sched.Margin key 001

Ignore the warning by pressing «Enter». Go to the next tab with «Enter».

MRP 3

Strategy group 20 (Make-to-order production)

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

96
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

MRP 4, Work scheduling, Plant Data/Storage 1 &


2 and Warehouse management 1 & 2
No data need to be entered in the ‘MRP 4’, ‘Work scheduling’, ‘Plant data/ storage 1’ or
‘Plant data/storage 2’ screens. It is important however to press «Enter» in each of these six
screens, which the system confirms by . Views that have not yet been checked can be
recognized by . The activation of the views ‘Plant data/storage 1/2’ and ‘Warehouse
management 1/2’ has the implication that your material can be stored in storage location
FG00 and warehouse 100 with storage type 001 in plant HD00.

Accounting 1

Valuation class 7920

Standard price 500

Prc. Ctrl. S

88
The stock valuation of the finished product is based 8on
8 a standard price of €500 (ignore
the warning about local currency). Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Accounting 2
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
No data need to be entered in view ‘Accounting 2’. Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Costing 1
Activate with a checkmark the material is costed with quantity structure. .
Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Costing 2
No data need to be entered in view ‘Costing 2’. Give «Enter» to create it .

After you have entered the last view press «Save» or answer the question whether the data
should be saved with ‘Yes’.

97
Costing 2
No data need to be entered in view ‘Costing 2’. Give «Enter» to create it .

After
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI you have entered the last view press «Save»
Logistic or answer
Master Data the question w
should be saved with ‘Yes’.
13.2.1 FRAME
13.1.2 Frame
Create a material, a special frame, via the app in group ‘Materials Management’:
Create a material, a special frame, via the app in group ‘Materials Manageme

The material code to be entered is FR??? and again the industry sector is ‘M
The material code to be enteredengineering’.
is FR??? and Theagain the type
material industry
is ‘Rawsector is ‘Mechanical
materials’.
engineering’. The material type is ‘Raw materials’.
Press «Select view(s)». The entries are spread over a number of screens. Select
• Basic Data 1
Press «Select view(s)». The entries are spread
• Basicover a number
Data 2 of screens. Select the following
views: • Purchasing
• Purchase Order Text
• Basic Data 1 • MRP 1
• Basic Data 2 • MRP 2
• MRP 3
• Purchasing
• MRP 4
• Purchase Order Text
• Forecasting
• MRP 1 • General Plant Data/Storage 1
• MRP 2 • General Plant Data/Storage 2
• MRP 3 • Warehouse Management 1
• MRP 4 • Warehouse Management 2
• Forecasting • Accounting 1
• General Plant Data/Storage 1 • Accounting 2
• General Plant Data/Storage 2 • Costing 1
• Costing 2.
• Warehouse Management 1
• Warehouse Management 2
• Accounting 1
104
105
• Accounting
HANDS-ON 2 AND IDES
WITH SAP ERP logistic master
• Costing 1 data

• Costing 2.

Finally select

Click on the «Continue (Enter)» button. This opens the ‘Organizational levels’ screen.

98
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

The following must be entered here:

Plant HD00

Stor. Location RM00

Whse. number 100

Storage type 001

Press «Continue (Enter)».

Basic data 1
Make up the English description of the material so that it is clear that you have set up
this frame.

Basic unit measure PC (Piece(s))

Material group RAW

Gross weight 7

Weight unit KG

Net weight 7

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Basic data 2
No data need to be entered in the ‘Basic data 2’ screen. Go to the next tab with «Enter».

99
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

Purchasing

Purchasing group E00

Autom. PO  (Automatic purchase order on)

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Purchase order text


Think up a suitable text for yourself, as you did with the sales text. Click outside the text
area and go to the next tab with «Enter».

MRP 1

MRP type VM (Automatic reorder point planning)

MRP controller 000

Lot Sizing Proc. TB

Go to the next tab with «Enter» and ignore the warning with «Enter».

MRP 2

Plnd. delivery time 1 day

Sched. Margin key 001

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

100
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

MRP 3

Availability check 01

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

MRP 4
No input is needed in the ‘MRP 4’ screen. Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Forecasting

Forecast model D

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

Plant data/storage 1, Plant data/storage 2 and Warehouse management 1


No data need to be entered into the ‘Plant data/storage 1’, ‘Plant data/storage 2’ and
‘Warehouse management 1’ screens. You have to press «Enter» on these screens to allow
the materials to be stored in this warehouse.

Warehouse management 2

Storage Bin STBN-1-???

Go to the next tab with «Enter».

101
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

Accounting 1

Valuation class 3000

Per. unit price €100

Price control V

The stock valuation is based on a moving average price. Go to the next tab with «Enter».

A message can be ignored with «Enter».

Accounting 2, Costing 1 and 2


No data need to be entered in views ‘Accounting 2’, ‘Costing 1’ and ‘Costing 2’. Give
«Enter» at each view to create it.

After you have entered the last view press «Save» or answer the question whether the data
should be saved with ‘Yes’.

13.1.3 WHEELS

Finally, you are going to enter a wheel with the material code WL???. Make use of the same
menu again. The same views are to be entered for the wheel as for the frame.

Enter the same organizational data as for the frame. All the other data are the same as for
the frame, with the exception of the description and the weight of the wheel 1 kg in Basic
Data 1. In Warehouse Management 2 the bin for the wheels is STBN-2-???. In Accounting
1 the moving average price is €45.

102
menu again. The same views are to be entered for the wheel as for the fram
13.1.3 Wheels
Enter the same organizational data as for the frame. All the other data are th
Finally, you the
frame, with are exception
going to enter
of thea description
wheel with the
and material code
the weight of WL???. Mak
the wheel 1k
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data
menu again. The same views are to be entered for the wheel as
1. In Warehouse Management 2 the bin for the wheels is STBN-2-???. for the frame
the moving average price is €45.
Enter
When a view is missing the view can the
be same
createdorganizational
by choosing:data as for the frame. All the other data are th
frame,
When awith
viewthe exception
is missing theofview
the description andby
can be created thechoosing:
weight of the wheel 1 k
1. In Warehouse Management 2 the bin for the wheels is STBN-2-???.
the moving average price is €45.

When a view is missing the view can be created by choosing:

You have to create the view, because it does not exist for the already created

An existing
You have to create the view, because it doesview
notcan befor
exist altered by way of
the already ‘change’:
created material.

You have to create the view, because it does not exist for the already created
An existing view can be altered by way of ‘change’:
An existing view can be altered by way of ‘change’:

13.2 BILL OF MATERIAL


The bill of material is a list of materials of which another material is made.
may consist of a number of different levels. A bicycle has a frame, handlebars
etc. A wheel
13.2 in turn
BILL OF consists of a rim, a number of spokes, rim binding, an i
MATERIAL
outer casing.
The bill of material is a list of materials of which another material is made.
may
You consist of the
will keep a number
bill of of different
material for levels. A bicycle
the special hassimple;
bicycle a frame,the
handlebars
company
13.2 BILL OF MATERIAL etc. A wheel in turn consists of a rim, a number of spokes, rim binding,
special bicycle from two wheels and a frame. The bill of material is created an ia
outer
group casing.
‘Production
The bill of material is a list of materials Planning
of which another and Execution’:
material is made. A bill of material
may consist of a number of different levels. A bicycle has a frame, handlebars, a saddle,
You will keep the bill of material for the special bicycle simple; the company
wheels, etc. A wheel in turn consists
specialofbicycle
a rim,from
a number of spokes,
two wheels rim binding,
and a frame. The billanofinner
material is created a
tube and an outer casing. group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

You will keep the bill of material for the special bicycle simple; the company assembles a
special bicycle from two wheels and a frame. The bill of material is created as part of the
108
group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

108

103
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES logi

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES logistic master


data

To create a new BOM click on


In the popup window type as the material, enter the number of the whole b
To create a new BOM click on plant is HD00 and ‘BOM Usage’ is 1. Press «OK».

In the popup window type as the


Thematerial, enterofthe
components the number of the
bicycle are the frame
wholeand
bicycle SB???. wheels for thi
two special
The plant is HD00 and ‘BOM Usage’ is 1. Press «OK».
The Item category is ‘L(Stock item)’. Enter the already created numbers of
The components of the bicycle and the frame
are the wheel and
(WL???)
two as components.
special Enter
wheels for this the ‘Component Quantity’, 1
bicycle.
PC wheels per bicycle. «Save» this bill of material.
The Item category is ‘L(Stock item)’. Enter the already created numbers of the frame (FR???)
and the wheel (WL???) as components. Enter the ‘Component Quantity’, 1 PC frame and
2 PC wheels per bicycle. «Save» this bill of material.

13.3 DIRECT WAGE HOURS AND MACHINE HOURS


For the production of the bicycles wageWITH
HANDS-ON hours and
SAP ERP ANDmachine
IDES hours are created. logis

13.3 DIRECT WAGE HOURS AND MACHINE HOURS


For the production of the bicycles wage hours and machine hours are create
Wage hours
Wage
Create the activity type wage with thehours
app in group ‘Controlling’:
Create the activity type wage with the app in group ‘Controlling’:

When you did not yet work in a Controlling Area you will get an error mess
this message. Select ‘Controlling Area’ EU00 and save this setting with «Sav
Parameters».
104
Activity type LB???
13.3 DIRECT WAGE HOURS AND MACHINE HOURS
For the production of the bicycles wage hours and machine hours are create
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

Wage hours
When you did not yet work in a Controlling Area you will get an error message. «Confirm»
Create the activity type wage with the app in group ‘Controlling’:
this message. Select ‘Controlling Area’ EU00 and save this setting with «Save as User
Parameters».

Activity type LB???

Valid from 01.01.[current year]

Copy from
When you did not yet work in a Controlling Area you will get an error mess
this message. SelectLABOR
Activity type ‘Controlling Area’ EU00 and save this setting with «Sav
Parameters».
Controlling area EU00
Activity type LB???
Valid from 01.01.[current year]

Click on «Master Data». ‘Name’ and ‘Description’


Copy from is ‘Labor hours ???’. Check the allocation
of cost element 800000. <<Save>> the activity type.
Activity type LABOR
Controlling area EU00

Click on «Master Data». ‘Name’ and ‘Description’ is ‘Labor hours ???’. Chec
of cost element 800000. Save the activity type.
Machine hours
Create the activity type machineMachine hours
hours with:
Create the activity type machine hours with:

Activity type MC???


Valid from 01.01.[current year]

Copy from
Activity type MLABOR
Controlling area EU00

110

105
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

Activity type MC???

Valid from 01.01.[current year]

Copy from

Activity type MLABOR

Controlling area EU00

Click on «Master Data». ‘Name’ and ‘Description’ is ‘Machine hours ???’. Change(!) cost
center category (CCtr Categories) to ‘F’
HANDS-ON and
WITH theAND
SAP ERP allocation
IDES cost element to 800010. Save logis
the activity type.
Click on «Master Data». ‘Name’ and ‘Description’ is ‘Machine hours ???’. Cha
category (CCtr Categories) to ‘F’ and the allocation cost element t o 800010. Sa
type.
Prices
Prices
Enter the prices for these activity types with:
Enter the prices for these activity types with:

Version 0
From period 1
Version To period 0 12
From period
Fiscal year 1
[current year]
Cost center EUPR1000
To period Activity type 12 LB???

Fiscal year
Click [currentEnter
on «Overview screen». year] the ‘Variable Price’ 60,00. «Post» the dat

Cost center EUPR1000


Repeat this step for Activity type MC??? with a ‘Variable Price’ 697,00. «Pos
Activity type LB???
13.4 WORK CENTER
The work center for capacity planning purposes for persons who are to carr
work is created in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ using:
106
Version 0
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data
From period 1
To period 12
Click on «Overview screen». Enter the ‘Variable
Fiscal year Price’ 60,00.[current
«Post»year]
the data.
Cost center EUPR1000
Repeat this step for Activity type MC???Activity
with atype LB???
‘Variable Price’ 697,00. «Post» the data.

Click on «Overview screen». Enter the ‘Variable Price’ 60,00. «Post» the dat

Repeat this step for Activity type MC??? with a ‘Variable Price’ 697,00. «Pos
13.4 WORK CENTER
13.4 purposes
The work center for capacity planning WORK forCENTER
persons who are to carry out the assembly
work is created in group ‘Production Planning
The work centerand Execution’
for capacity using: purposes for persons who are to carr
planning
work is created in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ using:

The plant is HD00, the work center is WC??? and the work center categor
Copy from plant HD00 and Ref. work center ASSY1000.
The plant is HD00, the work center is WC??? and the work center category is 0003 (Labor).
Copy from plant HD00 and Ref. After
workpressing
center«Next screen» select:
ASSY1000.
• Basic Data
After pressing «Next screen» select: • Texts
• Classification
• Subsystem Grouping
• Basic
HANDS-ON Data
WITH SAP ERP AND IDES logistic
111 master
data
• Texts
• Classification
• Subsystem Grouping
• Default Values
• Capacities
• Scheduling
• Costing

Click on «Copy (Enter)» .

Click on the tab ‘Basic Data’.

Change the description of the work center to ‘HD Assembly ???’.

107
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Logistic Master Data

Select the tab ‘Capacities’ tab and enter 002 as the ‘Capacity category’. By pressing «Enter»
you are able to create the Capacity header data:

Description for 002 Bike Assembler ???

Capacity Responsible A

Capacity Base Unit MIN

Capacity Utilization 100

No. Ind. Capacities 1

After «Back» (a warning can be ignored), you select the tab ‘Scheduling’ you check the
‘Capacity category’ 002. Remove ‘SAP001’ at ‘ Duration of Setup’.

Finally at the tab ‘Costing’ check ‘Cost center’ EUPR1000 (Production costs). Enter in the
‘Activities Overview’:

Activity type Activity Unit Formula

Setup <Blank>

Machine MC??? Min SAP002

Labor LB??? Min SAP003

« Save » this work center (a warning can be ignored).

13.5 ROUTING
The routing, the operations to be followed in order to assemble the bicycle, are specified
in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ by choosing:

108
« Save » this work center (a warning can be ignored).

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI


13.5 ROUTING Logistic Master Data

The routing, the operations to be followed in order to assemble the bicycle,


in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ by choosing:

The material is the number of the bicycle SB???. Enter the plant HD00.
After pressing «Continue (Enter)» the ‘Create Routing: Header Details’ scre
The material is the number of the bicycle SB???. Enter the plant HD00.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
Usage 1 (Production)
logistic master
Overall Routing:
After pressing «Continue (Enter)» the ‘Create Status 4 Details’
Header (Released
data (general))
screen is shown.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES logistic master


data 112
Usage 1 (Production)

Overall Status 4 (Released (general))

Click on the «Operation» button. For the operation number 0010 enter WC???
for the work center and for the Con… (Control key) enter PP01.

Double click on operation line 0010 and enter:

Std value Un Act. Type

Machine 20 Min MC???

Labor 40 Min LB???

Finally, after allocating the components with the «Allocation» (Component


Allocation) button, the bill of material is accepted. Check the bill of material (if this is not
correct, first change the bill of material with the button «BOM» and then «Back»).

«Save» the routing and note the group number.

109
Finally, after allocating the components with the «Allocation»
Allocation) button, the bill of material is accepted. Check the bill of mate
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA ANDcorrect,
GBI first change the bill of material with the Master
Logistic button Data
«BOM» and then «
«Save» the routing and note the group number.
13.6 PRODUCTION VERSION
Allocate the Routing and the Bill13.6 PRODUCTION
of Materials VERSION
to the finished product. Sometimes the routing
depends on the production lotAllocate
size, i.e.theproduction quantity.
Routing and UseMaterials
the Bill of in group ‘Production
to the finished product. Some
Planning and Execution’: depends on the production lot size, i.e. production quantity. Use in g
Planning and Execution’:

Enter the finished product SB??? and «Continue (Enter)». Select the view M
«Continue (Enter)». Use the plant HD00 and again «Continue (Enter)».
Enter the finished product SB??? and «Continue (Enter)». Select the view MRP 4
and «Continue (Enter)». Use Click
theon plant
the button
HD00 and again «Continue . In the first line create versio
(Enter)».
Click on the button ‘Production . In the first line create version V??? with text and valid to
version SB??? up to 4000 pc’. Valid from <Today>
year>.
‘Production version SB??? up to 4000 pc’. Valid from <Today> and valid to 31.12.<current
Choose «Details».
year>.

Choose «Details».

Minimum Lot Size 1


114

Maximum Lot Size 4000


HANDS-ON
HANDS-ON WITH
WITHSAP
SAP ERP
ERPAND
AND IDES
IDES logistic
logistic master
master
data
data
Detailed planning Task List Type Routing

Detailed planning Group <number from paragraph 13.5>


Search using material

113
Bill of material

Alternative BOM 1

OM Usage 1

Check this with . Use «Back (F3)» to return to the Production Version
Details. Two green lights must appear for the planning data and the bill of material. Now
«Continue (Enter)» twice to return to the MRP 4 tab. Finally «Save» the changes made for
this material.

110
BOM Usage 1

Check this with . Use «Back (F3)» to return to the Pr


Details.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Two green lights must appear for
Logistic Master Dataand the bill of m
the planning data
«Continue (Enter)» twice to return to the MRP 4 tab. Finally «Save» the cha
this material.
13.7 INFO RECORD
You are going to create an info 13.7
record INFO
showing that a particular supplier is the supplier of
RECORD
the material you have created.
You are going to create an info record showing that a particular supplier is t
material you have created.
To create the info, use in group ‘Materials Management’:
To create the info, use in group ‘Materials Management’:

Use the vendor/supplier you created with name Supplier <your name>.
Use the vendor/supplier you created with name Supplier <your name>. You can find the
vendor with and search the vender at the tab ‘Suppliers (General) by the s
vendor with and search thename>.
vender at the tab ‘Suppliers (General) by the search term
<your name>.
Material FR???
Material Purchasing Org. FR??? DE00
Plant
Purchasing Org. DE00
HD00
This is a standard info record. Press «Enter».
At the ‘General data’ screen;
Plant HD00no data need to be filled in here.
Using «Purch. Org. data 1» enter the planned delivery time as 1 day. The pu
E00 and the standard quantity is 1 piece. Further down the screen enter the
«Save»
This is a standard info record. Press the info record.
«Enter».

Also enter a second info record for the same supplier <your name> and
At the ‘General data’ screen; nostandard
data need to be is
quantity filled in here.
2. The net price for one wheel is € 44.
115
114

Using «Purch. Org. data 1» enter the planned delivery time as 1 day. The purchasing group
is E00 and the standard quantity is 1 piece. Further down the screen enter the net price as
€ 99. «Save» the info record.

Also enter a second info record for the same supplier <your name> and wheel WL???. The
standard quantity is 2. The net price for one wheel is € 44.

All master data has been created and you can make a start on the complete ERP process!

111
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

14 COMPLETE ERP PROCESS


In this chapter you carry out a make-to-order production process: from purchasing, inventory,
and production to sales. The process is a sales-driven assembly production process planned
by a MRP I run.

14.1 GENERAL
This process is using the master data that was created in previous chapters: the customer,
the vendor, the employee, the materials and the other logistic master data.

The process starts with a quotation for five special bicycles. Because of the unpredictable
demand for the bicycle it is not on stock. The bicycle is assembled and the frame and
wheels are procured externally. The customer accepts the quotation and the quotation
can be transferred into a sales order. The logistics control department plans production
and purchasing requirements with an MRP-run. Purchasing will convert the purchasing
requirements into a purchase order and the frames and the wheels will be purchased, delivered
into the warehouse and invoiced. The invoice will be paid. The planned production can start
and the raw materials can be issued. When the production order is completed the finished
product will be stored in the warehouse. The sales order can be delivered and invoiced. The
customer pays the invoice.

14.2 C-BUSINESS LOGISTICS DIAGRAM


The C-Business logistics diagram is shown in Figure 14.1.

112
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e E RP P roc ess

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e

FigureFigure
14.1 C-Business logistics diagram
14.1 C-Business logistics diagram

Figure 14.1 C-Business logistics diagram


14.3 CREATE A QUOTATION FOR A CUSTOMER
14.3
In CREATE
group ‘Sales A QUOTATION
and Distribution’ use the appFOR A CUSTOMER
(the number indicates the quantity quotations in
the system):
In group ‘Sales and Distribution’14.3
use the app (the
CREATE A number indicates
QUOTATION FORthe
A quantity
CUSTOMER quotations
in the system):
In group ‘Sales and Distribution’ use the app (the number indicates the quan
the system):

Click on «Create Quotation»

The quotation type is ‘QT’. Press «Continue (Enter)» to see the overview screen to create a
quotation. Click on «Create Quotation»
The Sold-to party is the customerThe
youquotation
created with
typename Bikeshop
is ‘QT’. <your name>.
Press «Continue Youtocan
(Enter)» see the overview scre
find the customer with quotation.
and search the customer at the tab ‘Customers (General) by the
search term <your name>. 113
The Sold-to 117
party is the customer you created with name Bikeshop <your n
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Click on «Create Quotation»

The quotation type is ‘QT’. Press «Continue (Enter)» to see the overview screen to create
a quotation.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Complete ERP Process

The Sold-to party is the customer you created with name Bikeshop <your name>. You can
and search the customer at thePart
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
find the customer with tab 2‘Customers
Complete ERP Process
(General) by
118
the search term <your name>.

In tab ‘Item Overview’ the ‘Valid from’ and ‘Valid to’ fields must be set at the current date
and the current date plus one week respectively.

The customer requests a quotation for ‘Material’


HANDS-ON SB???
WITH SAP ERP and an ‘Order Quantity’ of 5 bicycles.
AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e

Check the quotation by pressing «Enter».


In tab ‘Item Overview’ the ‘Valid from’ and ‘Valid to’ fields must be set at th
the current
Make sure the quotation is complete. Selectdate plus one week
, next respectively.
‘Edit’ and finally ‘Incompletion
The customer requests a quotation for ‘Material’ SB??? and an ‘Order Quan
log’. If data are missing, select Plant. Press «Complete Data». The plant is ‘HD00’. After
pressing «Enter» the shipping point is added. Choose «Edit Next Data». You return to
Check the quotation by pressing «Enter».
the quotation overview and at the information at the bottom of the screen the message
‘Document is complete’ should Make sure the quotation is complete. Select
appear. , next ‘Edit’ and fina
log’. If data are missing, select Plant. Press «Complete Data». The plant
pressing «Enter» the shipping point is added. Choose «Edit Next Data». Y
«Save» the quotation. Note the number of the sales quotation in the scenario at the beginning
quotation overview and at the information at the bottom of the screen the me
of this chapter. is complete’ should appear.

«Save» the quotation. Note the number of the sales quotation in the scenario
of this chapter.
14.4 CREATE A CUSTOMER ORDER
14.4 CREATE A CUSTOMER ORDER
If the customer accepts our quotation, it can be converted into an order:
If the customer accepts our quotation, it can be converted into an order:

Enter ‘OR’ (Standard order) as order type. To avoid having to enter all the d
from the quotation can be used. Select «Create with reference» and enter the
number.

The quotation
114number can be retrieved by entering in the ‘Search criteria’ fo
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Enter ‘OR’ (Standard order) as order type. To avoid having to enter all the data again, the
data from the quotation can be used. Select «Create with reference» and enter the quotation
number.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Compl

The quotation number can be retrieved by entering in the ‘Search criteria’ for the ‘sold to
party’ your customer. You can find the customer with and search the customer at the
tab ‘Customers (General) by the search term <your name>. With «Search» the quotations
of the customer are listed. Select the quotation.

Copy the quotation using «Copy».

Enter a random number as Cust. Reference. This would be the purchase order number that
comes from the customer’s purchase system. The Cust.Ref.Date is the current date.

Double click on the first item (for example on the order quantity 5) to see the details for
this item. Choose the tab ‘Shipping’. Check and complete by adding the ‘Storage Location’:

Plant HD00

Shipping point HD00

Stor. Loc. FG00

If all the data are correct you can «Save» the order. Note of the sales order number in the
C-Business diagram.

14.5 THE STOCK/REQUIREMENTS LIST


Open in an new tab in your browser and start S/4 GBI in that tab as well. Select from the
group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

115
14.5 THE STOCK/REQUIREMENTS LIST
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process
Open in an new tab in your browser and start S/4 GBI in that tab as well. Sel
‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Enter the material number of the bicycle SB??? and plant HD00. Press «Co
Enter the material number of the The ‘Stock’
bicycle is zero.
SB??? andThis
plantis HD00.
a sales order
Pressdriven process,
«Continue because in the bicycl
(Enter)».
MRP 3 the strategy group 20 (Make-to-order production) was chosen. The
theorder
The ‘Stock’ is zero. This is a sales specific ‘CustSt’
driven (Customer
process, becausestock),
in the that is registered
bicycle master dataunder the quotat
‘CusOrd’ (Customer order) creates a shortage of 5 bicycles. Check the docum
view MRP 3 the strategy group 20 (Make-to-order production) was chosen. The system will
the quantity.
check the specific ‘CustSt’ (Customer stock), that is registered under the quotation number.
The ‘CusOrd’ (Customer order) creates
Once you ahaveshortage
studiedofthe5 list,
bicycles.
switchCheck
to the the
otherdocument
tab in your browser to
numbers and the quantity. next paragraph. Return to this monitor after every paragraph so that you c
consequences. The consequences become visible after «Refresh».
Once you have studied the list, switch to the other tab in your browser to continue with
the next paragraph. Return to this14.6 REQUIREMENTS
monitor PLANNING
after every paragraph so that(MRP)
you can understand
the consequences. The consequences become visible
The customer after
order has been «Refresh».
entered. There is a requirement for five bicycle
to be assembled. The components, the frame and the wheels, need to be pur
MRP run is carried out the requirements for five frames and ten wheels are
on the bill of materials.
14.6 REQUIREMENTS PLANNING (MRP)>
Execute this MRP planning in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution
The customer order has been entered. There is a requirement for five bicycles. These still
have to be assembled. The components, the frame and the wheels, need to be purchased.
When the MRP run is carried out the requirements for five frames and ten wheels are
generated, based on the bill of materials.

Execute this MRP planning in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Enter the bicycle number SB??? and plant HD00.

Processing Key NETCH Net Change in Total Horizon


Create purchase req. 2 Purchase req. in opening period
SA Deliv. Sched. Lines. 3 Schedule lines
Create MRP List 1 MRP List
119

116
The customer order has been entered. There is a requirement for five bicycle
to be assembled. The components, the frame and the wheels, need to be pur
MRP run is carried out the requirements for five frames and ten wheels are
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA ANDon
GBIthe bill of materials. Complete ERP Process

Execute this MRP planning in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution

Enter the bicycle number SB??? and plant HD00.

Enter the bicycle number SB??? and plant HD00.


Processing Key NETCH Net Change in Total Horizon
Create purchase req. 2 Purchase req. in opening period
Processing Key NETCHSA Deliv.NetSched. Lines. in Total
Change 3 Horizon Schedule lines
Create MRP List 1 MRP List
Create purchase req. 2 Purchase req. in opening period
119

SA Deliv. Sched. Lines. 3 Schedule lines

Create MRP List 1 WITH SAP ERP AND IDES


HANDS-ON MRP List Part 2 Com plet e E RP P

Planning mode 1 Adapt planning data (normal mode)


Planning mode 1 Adapt planning data (normal mode)
Scheduling 1 Scheduling Determination1 of Basic DateDetermination
for planned of Basic Date for plann

Press «Enter», read the warning and ignore it with «Enter» again.

You and
Press «Enter», read the warning see the result
ignore of the«Enter»
it with planning for the bicycle. Write down the planned o
again.
(PlOrd.) for the bicycle in the C-Business diagram. Later the planned order will
into a production
You see the result of the planning order. Write
for the bicycle. «Save and
downcontinue» the planning.
the planned order number
(PlOrd.) for the bicycle in the C-Business diagram. Later the planned order will be converted
Select ‘Proceed without stopping’ and «Continue». In the report you will see th
into a production order. «Save andhascontinue»
order’ the planning.
been created, as well as two purchase requisitions.

Select ‘Proceed without stopping’


Click onand«Materials».
«Continue». In the
Take report
a look youconsequences
at the will see that aof‘Planned
the MRP on a materi
basis,asby
order’ has been created, as well twodouble clicking
purchase on the materials. The result for the bicycle SB???
requisitions.
displayed. Next double click the frame FR??? and the wheel WL???. The ‘DepReq
Requirement) is caused by bicycle SB???. Check the quantities. Write down
(Purchase Requisition) numbers for both of the components, the wheels and the
purchase requisitions, generated by the planner, are later converted into purch
the purchasing department.

You can see the changes


117
in the requirements/stock list (see 14.5) in the othe
browser as result of the MRP-run after «Refresh».
Press «Enter», read the warning and ignore it with «Enter» again.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

You see the result of the planning for the bicycle. Write down the plann
(PlOrd.)
Click on «Materials». Take a look for the
at the bicycle in the
consequences of C-Business
the MRP on diagram. Later the planned order
a material-by-
into a production order. «Save and continue» the planning.
material basis, by double clicking on the materials. The result for the bicycle SB??? was
already displayed. Next double Select
click the frame without
‘Proceed FR??? and the wheel
stopping’ and WL???. The ‘DepReq’
«Continue». In the report you will se
(Dependent Requirement) is caused by bicycle SB???. Check the quantities. Write down
order’ has been created, as well as two purchase requisitions.
the ‘PurRqs’ (Purchase Requisition) numbers for both of the components, the wheels and
Click on generated
the frame. These purchase requisitions, «Materials».byTake
the aplanner,
look at are
the later
consequences
convertedofinto
the MRP on a m
basis, by
purchase orders by the purchasing department.double clicking on the materials. The result for the bicycle S
displayed. Next double click the frame FR??? and the wheel WL???. The ‘Dep
Requirement) is caused by bicycle SB???. Check the quantities. Write do
You can see the changes in the requirements/stock list (see 14.5) in the other tab in your
(Purchase Requisition) numbers for both of the components, the wheels and
browser as result of the MRP-run after «Refresh».
purchase requisitions, generated by the planner, are later converted into pu
the purchasing department.

You can see the changes in the requirements/stock list (see 14.5) in the
14.7 browser as
CREATE A PURCHASE result of FOR
ORDER the MRP-run after «Refresh».
THE SUPPLIER
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Complete ERP Process
The purchase requisition is created by the logistic planning department. The purchase
14.7 CREATE A PURCHASE ORDER FOR THE SUPPLIER
requisition will be sourced and next converted into an purchase order by the purchase
department. The purchase requisition is created by the logistic planning departmen
requisition will be sourced and next converted into an purchase order
department.
Choose in the group ‘Materials Management’:
Choose in the group ‘Materials Management’:

Enter in the field Search ‘*???’ and «Go» to retrieve both your frames and whe
Click«Go»
Enter in the field Search ‘*???’ and in thetocolumn
retrieve‘Assigned Supplier’
both your frameson thewheels.
and text ‘1 Sources’ (in case you see
an info record as described in the precious chapter). Choose the supplier by c
120
Click in the column ‘Assigned Supplier’ on the text ‘1 Sources’ (in case you see no source,
create an info record as described in the precious chapter). Choose the supplier by check-
marking the radio button in front of the right info record. Do this for both frames and
wheels. The number
HANDS-ON ofERP
WITH SAP theAND
supplier
IDES should be visible now for both
Partpurchase requisitions.
2 Complete ERP Process

The next step is to select both sourced purchase requisitions and «Create Purchase
Order» for both since they have the same supplier.

118
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process
radio button in front of the right info record. Do this for both frames and wh
of the supplier should be visible now for both purchase requisitions.
The purchase order type is ‘Standard PO’. «Save» the purchase order and note the purchase
order number in the C-Business diagram.
The next step is to select both sourced purchase requisitions and «Create
for both since they have the same supplier.
Go «Back» to the screen to manage the purchase requisitions and check that the processing
The purchase
status has changed to ‘PO created’. order type can
The consequences is ‘Standard PO’. «Save»
be monitored the purchase
with the stock/ order and n
order number
requirement list (change the ‘Material’ in or
to FR??? theWL???),
C-Business diagram. 14.5.
see paragraph
Go «Back» to the screen to manage the purchase requisitions and check that
status has changed to ‘PO created’. The consequences can be monitored wit
stock/requirement list (change the ‘Material’ to FR??? or WL???), see paragr
14.8 GOODS RECEIPT FROM A SUPPLIER
14.8 GOODS RECEIPT FROM A SUPPLIER
Post the goods receipt in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:
Post the goods receipt in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase Order’. Enter the purchase order n
next on the right of the ‘Purchase order’ field.
Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase
In case Order’.
you didEnter the the
not note purchase order
number, thenumber inorder
purchase the field
can be found with
nextHANDS-ON
on the right
WITH of
SAPthe
ERP‘Purchase
AND IDES order’ field.
tab ‘ Purchasing documents perPart Part 2 Complete ERP Process
Supplier’ and enter the number of the ven
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES 2 Complete ERP Process
the number). «Find» and double click the right PO number.
In case you did not note the number, the purchase order can be found with , choose
Give «Enter» to display the purchase order.
the tab ‘ Purchasing documents per Supplier’ and enter the number of the vender (or search
for the number). «Find» and double click the right PO number.
«Close Detail Data» with halfway down on the left side in the main scre
lines the Storage Location RM00 (Raw Materials). Select OK for both items,
Give «Enter» to display the purchase
«Post»order.
the receipt of the goods. Write down the goods receipt number i
diagram.
«Close Detail Data» with halfway down on the left side in the main screen. Enter
14.9RM00 (Raw
for both lines the Storage Location TRANSFER ORDER
Materials). SelectGOODS
OK for RECEIPT TO do
both items,
a «Check» and «Post» the receipt of the goods. PERMANENT
Write down STORAGE
the goods receipt number in
the C-Business diagram. The goods have been received in a goods receipt area and must be transpor
location in the warehouse. The location for these can be seen by choosing in g
Management’:

121

119
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

14.9 TRANSFER ORDER GOODS RECEIPT


TO PERMANENT STORAGE
The goods have been received in a goods receipt area and must be transported to a
particular location in the warehouse. The location for these can be seen by choosing in
group ‘Warehouse Management’:HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e

Enter a material (the frame FR??? or a wheel WL???). The plant is ‘HD00’.

Selection choose . Press «Execute» and Che


Enter a material (the frame FR??? or a wheel WL???). The plant is ‘HD00’. At the Stock
Right-click on the quantity and select ‘WM Stocks’ or use «More» and Got
Type Selection choose > WM Stocks. . Press «Execute» and Check the
quantities. Right-click on the quantity
Enter a and
The material select
just(the
material ‘WM
arrived Stocks’
and
frame wasor
FR??? oruse
received«More» and Goto
in WL???).
a wheel storage type > (GR
The 003
plant Area ExA
is ‘HD00’.
Environment > WM Stocks.
Selection
Create in choose
another tab in your browser a transport . Press
order«Execute» and Che
for the incoming
Right-click on thethe quantity and selectin‘WM Stocks’ or useManagement’:
«More» and Got
The material just arrived and wasrack storage
received ininstorage warehouse
type 003 using
(GR Area group ‘Warehouse
External Receipts).
> WM Stocks.
The material just arrived and was received in storage type 003 (GR Area Ex
Create in another tab in your browser a transport order for the incoming goods to the high
rack storage in the warehouse using
Createiningroup
another‘Warehouse Management’:
tab in your browser a transport order for the incoming
rack storage in the warehouse using in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

Warehouse number 100


Material FR???
Plant HD00
Stor. Location RM00
Warehouse number
123
100
Warehouse Number
Press «Enter». 100
MaterialSelect the transfer requirement
FR??? created by the receipt of the g
requirement is converted into a transfer order using the «TO in foreground
Plant Plant HD00 HD00
Stor. Location
With «Enter» RM00to the items. At ‘Items’, indicate th
the quantity is transferred
Stor. Location RM00
to be stored on standard pallets (SUT, Storage unit type) E1. The type is 0
Press «Enter».
the Sec Select
(Section) the and
is 001 transfer requirement created
the ‘Destination by the receiptSave
bin’ is STBN-1-???. of the
thego
t
requirement is converted into a transfer order using the «TO in foreground
«Posting». Note the number of the transfer order in the C-Business diagr

With
Take «Enter»
a look inthe
thequantity
other tabis at
transferred to the items.
the consequence of thisAtaction.
‘Items’, indicate th
If necessary
120
to be storedNotice
«Refresh». on standard pallets
that the (SUT, Storage
five frames are stillunit type)inE1.
located The
area type
003 (GRis 00
A
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Press «Enter». Select the transfer requirement created by the receipt of the goods. The transfer
requirement is converted into a transfer order using the «TO in foreground».

With «Enter» the quantity is transferred to the items. At ‘Items’, indicate that the frames
are to be stored on standard pallets (SUT, Storage unit type) E1. The type is 001 (Shelf
storage), the Sec (Section) is 001 and the ‘Destination bin’ is STBN-1-???. Save the transfer
order with «Posting». Note the number of the transfer order in the C-Business diagram.

Take a look in the other tab at the consequence of this action. If necessary click on

«Refresh». Notice that the five frames are still located in area 003 (GR Area), as a picking
quantity and to be stored in 001 (Shelf Storage).

Confirm the transfer order by choosing in group ‘Warehouse Management’:


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e

Enter the number of the transfer order and the warehouse number 100. Pre
the data
Enter the number of the transfer orderand
andsave
thethe confirmation
warehouse with 100.
number «Posting».
Press «Enter».
Check the data and save the confirmation with «Posting».
Check
Enter the
the stock
numberoverview
of the with:
transfer order and the warehouse number 100. Pre
the data and save the confirmation with «Posting».
Check the stock overview with:
Check the stock overview with:

The same procedure must be carried out for the wheels, with the differenc
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???. Note the transfer order in the C-Bu

Are
Theboth
sameFR??? and WL???
procedure mustInbethe high rack
carried out storage? Check with
for the wheels, with‘ Display Stock
the differenc
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???. Note the transfer order in the C-B
Did you confirm both transfer orders?
Are both FR??? and WL??? In the high rack storage? Check with ‘ Display Stoc
121
14.10 RECEIPT
Did you confirm both OF THE INVOICE
transfer orders? FROM THE SUPPLIER
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

The same procedure must be carried out for the wheels, with the difference that the wheels
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???. Note the transfer order in the C-Business diagram.

Are both FR??? and WL??? In theThe same


high rackprocedure must be
storage? Check carried
with out for
‘ Display the Overview’.
Stock wheels, with the differenc
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???. Note the transfer order in the C-B
Did you confirm both transfer orders?
Are both FR??? and WL??? In the high rack storage? Check with ‘ Display Stoc
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Complete ERP Process

Did you confirm both transfer orders?


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Complete ERP Proc

14.10 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER


14.10 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER
The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Management’:
The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Manag

When asked, give as the company code DE00 and «Continue (Enter)».
Enter
When asked, give as the company theDE00
code currentand
date as the invoice
«Continue date and as the posting date. At ‘amou
(Enter)».
€1112,65. Enter the currency EUR in the field next to the amount. Activate
. The VAT
Enter the current date as the invoice date and as the posting date.isAt
V1‘amount’
(19% domestic
enter input tax).
123
€1112,65. Enter the currency EUR in the field next to the amount. Activate ‘Calculate tax’
. The VAT is V1 (19% domestic input tax).
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e E RP P roc ess

Select the tab ‘PO Reference’.


Select the tab ‘PO Reference’.

Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, search for the order
number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections for the Purchasing
Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, search for the
Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right supplier. «Execute»
order number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections for
and select the number of the purchase order and click on «Copy».)
the Purchasing Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right
supplier. «Execute»
Press «Enter» and and the details
select order
the purchase number of the
appear on purchase
the screen.order and click on «Copy».)

In the ‘Payment’ tab, enter the current date as the ‘Baseline date’ and 0003 as the payment
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.

Calculate and write down the amount to be 122


paid to the vendor, taking in account the cash
discount of 3%.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, sea
Press «Enter» and the purchase number
order details
in theappear
middle on thescreen
of the screen.with the entry options. In the ‘Selections f
Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right su
In the ‘Payment’ tab, enter the current date asthe
and select thenumber
‘Baseline
of date’ and 0003order
the purchase as theand
payment
click on «Copy».)
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.
Press «Enter» and the purchase order details appear on the screen.
Calculate and write down the amount to be paid to the vendor, taking in account the cash
discount of 3%. In the ‘Payment’ tab, enter the current date as the ‘Baseline date’ and 000
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.
«Post» the invoice and note the number in the C-Business diagram.
Calculate and write down the amount to be paid to the vendor, taking in
discount of 3%.

«Post» the invoice and note the number in the C-Business diagram.
14.11 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE
The outgoing payment by the14.11 PAYMENT
is bank is done. OF THE
Post the SUPPLIER’S
outgoing paymentINVOICE
from the
Deutsche Bank (ledger numberThe outgoing
100000) withpayment by the is
a deduction of bank is done.
3% cash Post theUse
discount. outgoing
in payment fr
group ‘Financial Accounting’: Bank (ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in
Accounting’:

The company code is DE00. For Thethe


company
Postingcode
Dateis and
DE00. For the
Journal Posting
Entry DateDate andtoday’s
enter Journal Entry Date
The Bank Data G/L account requested is 100000.
date. The Bank Data G/L account requested is 100000. The amount was written down The amount
in was written
previous paragraph. Open items selection with Account type ‘Supplier’ and
the previous paragraph. Open items selection with Account type ‘Supplier’ and for Account
enter <your name> and click on the right supplier. With «Show items» the o
ID enter <your name> and clicksupplier
on the are
right supplier. With «Show items» the open items
displayed.
for this supplier are displayed.
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
Check the balance at the right top of the screen. It should be zero in green.
Check the balance at the right the
topdiscount. «Simulate»
of the screen. the posting
It should andinwhen
be zero everything
green. looks fine « Post»
Check the
discount. «Simulate» the postingpayment.
and when Make a note of
everything the fine
looks posting number
«Post» in the C-Business
the payment. Make diagram.
a note of the posting number in the C-Business diagram. 124

123
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND HANDS-ON
GBI WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Complete ERP Process Part 2 Com plet e

14.12 PRODUCTION ORDER


14.12
The planned order was created by PRODUCTION
the MRP run. ORDER
This planned order must be converted into
The planned
a production order. From the group orderPlanning
‘Production was created
andbyExecution’
the MRP run.
use: This planned order must b
production order. From the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ use:

Enter as material the number of the bicycle SB??? and plant HD00. Press «E
Enter as material the number of the bicycle SB??? and plant HD00. Press «Enter».
Double click on the planned order (PldOrd) and click «→Prod.Ord» o
Double click on the planned orderselect(PldOrd) and click «→Prod.Ord» or right click and
‘→ Prod.Ord.’.
select ‘→ Prod.Ord.’.
This brings you into the screen ‘Production order Create: Header’. Check th
necessary change the order start and end date into the current date.
This brings you into the screen ‘Production order Create: Header’. Check the data and
where necessary
HANDS-ON change
WITH SAP theIDES
ERP AND Check
order startthe
andstatus
end of theinto
date production
thePart 2order
current with ERP Process
date.
Complete and go «Back» to the
Carry out the raw materials availability check using «Material». If the raw
available
Check the status of the production for this order
order with quantity,
and go dothe
«Back» to not save the
previous production orde
screen.
stock/requirements list for these raw materials.
Carry out the raw materials availability
Click «Costcheck usingso«Material».
order» If the
that the cost raw materials
estimation are not structure for t
with quantity
available for this order quantity,produced
do not save the production
is carried ordercosts’
out. The ‘plan and for
check
thisthe stock/
order are calculated an
requirements list for these raw materials.
confirmed with a message in the information bar below in your screen: ‘Co
see cost display’. Check and analyze the budgeted production costs with
> Costs
Click «Cost order» so that the cost > Analysis.
estimation withCheck instead
quantity of thefor
structure variant ‘Analysis’toalso the variants
the quantity
Itemization’ and ‘Goto > Costs > Cost Component Split’.
be produced is carried out. The ‘plan costs’ for this order are calculated and posted. This → is
confirmed with a message in the information bar below in your screen: ‘Costs determined®
Go «Back» to ‘Production order Create: Header’. «Release Order» and chec
see cost display’. Check and analyze the budgeted production costs with «More» and Goto
withof the variant
> Costs > Analysis. Check instead . ‘Analysis’ also the variants ‘Goto > Costs
> Itemization’ and ‘Goto > Costs > Cost Component Split’.
«Save» the production order and note the number of this production order
ERP AND IDES Part 2 Complete ERP Process
diagram.
Go «Back» to ‘Production order GoCreate:
«Back» Header’. «Release Order» and
to the Stock/Requirements Listcheck the status The planned o
and «Refresh».
again with . into a production order.

«Save» the production order and note the number of this production order in the C-Business
diagram.


124 125
→→

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Go «Back» to the Stock/Requirements List and «Refresh». The planned order is converted
into a production order.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e E RP P roc ess Part 2 Com plet e
14.13 INSSUE OF RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION
14.13 and wheels
The frames ISSUEare OF
to be14.13
RAW MATERIALS
taken ISSUE
out of the TO OF RAW MATERIALS
PRODUCTION
warehouse and TO PRODUCTION
used by production. From
The frames
the group and wheels
‘Production are The
Planning beframes
toand taken and of
out
Execution’wheels are to be taken
the warehouse
use: out of
and used by the warehouse
production. and used by pr
From
the group
the group ‘Production Planning ‘Production
and Execution’ use:Planning and Execution’ use:

The
The production order can be production
retrieved with order can be retrieved with
the Stock/Requirements theinStock/Requirements
List a other tab in your List in
browser. Press «Enter». browser. Press «Enter».
The production order can be retrieved with the Stock/Requirements List in a other tab in
your If there isPress
browser. a message If there
that goods
«Enter». is a message
movements are that goods movements
not allowed are you
for this order not must
allowed for this order
change
the status of the productionthe status
order. of thethe
Change production order. Change
order by selecting theStock/Requirements
it in the order by selecting it in the Sto
List, «Change Element» andList, «Change
release Element»
the order andparagraph)
(see last release theandorder
save(see
it. last paragraph) and save i
If there is a message that goods movements are not allowed for this order you must change
the status
«Closeof Detail
the production
Data» order. Change
«Close
. Enter the Data»
forDetail
both order by selecting
raw materials OK itfor
. Enter in both
the Stock/Requirements
and rawstorage
the materials OK (SLoc)
location and the stor
List, RM00.
«Change «Post» the issue
Element» RM00.
andofrelease
goods «Post»
and
the notethe
order theissue
(see last of
document goods andand
number
paragraph) note theC-Business
in save
the document diagram.
it. number in the C-B

«Close Detail Data» . Enter for both raw materials OK and the storage location
14.14 TRANSFER RAW 14.14MATERIALS TRANSFER RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION
TO PRODUCTION
(SLoc) RM00. «Post» the issue of goods and note the document number in the C-Business
diagram. Create
Create a transfer order for the a transfer
goods orderfrom
to be issued for the goods
shelf to be
storage issued
using from shelf
in group storage using in g
‘Warehouse
127 127
Management’: Management’:

14.14 TRANSFER RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION


Create a transfer order for the goods to be issued from shelf storage using in group
‘Warehouse Management’:

Warehouse number Warehouse


100 number 100
Material Material
FR??? FR???
125
Plant Plant
HD00 HD00
14.14 TRANSFER RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process
Create a transfer order for the goods to be issued from shelf storage using in g
Management’:

Warehouse number 100


Warehouse number 100
Material FR???
Material FR???
Plant HD00
Plant Stor. Location HD00 RM00

Stor.Press
Location
«Enter». RM00
Select the transport requirement that you created for goods is
With the «TO in foreground» button the transport requirement is converted
order.
Press «Enter». Select the transport requirement that you created for goods issue to production.
126
124
With the «TO in foreground» button the transport requirement is converted into a transport
order.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e E RP P
At ‘Quantities’ we can see the five frames that must be collected and an open quantity of
five items. The Storage typeAtsearch
‘Quantities’
must bewe 001
can see the five frames that must be collected and an open qu
items. The Storage type search must be 001

By pressing the «Stock figures» button you see the available stock level.
(In case
By pressing the «Stock figures» no stock
button is available,
you see checkstock
the available the stock
level. according to 14.9. A non-zero qua
quantity indicates you did not confirm the transfer order in 14.9).
(In case no stock is available,
Entercheck the stockquantity
the required according
in thetocolumn
14.9. A‘selected
non-zero quantity
quantity’. as the button «S
With
Pick quantity indicates youforeground» you will
did not confirm the see the transport
transfer order to be carried out. Check that ‘C
order in 14.9).
transfer order is set so that the transfer order is confirmed directly. Confirm the
Enter the required quantity«Enter»
in theand with «Posting»
column ‘selected the transfer With
quantity’. order is done.
the Note«Stock
button the number of the t
in the
removal foreground» you will C-Business
see the transportdiagram.
order to be carried out. Check that ‘Confirm’
this transfer order is set so that the transfer order is confirmed directly. Confirm the entries
Repeat the same procedure for the wheels WL???.
with «Enter» and with «Posting» the transfer order is done. Note the number of the transfer
order in the C-Business diagram.
14.15 CONFIRMATION OF A PRODUCTION ORDER
The production order completion will be confirmed and the actual realized wag
Repeat the same procedure for the wheels WL???.
machine hours will be posted. In group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

126
transfer order is set so that the transfer order is confirmed directly. Confirm
«Enter» and with «Posting» the transfer order is done. Note the number of
in the C-Business diagram.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Repeat the same procedure for the wheels WL???.


14.15 CONFIRMATION OF A PRODUCTION ORDER
14.15 CONFIRMATION OF A PRODUCTION ORDER
The production order completion will be confirmed and the actual realized wage hours and
Thegroup
machine hours will be posted. In production order Planning
‘Production completionandwill be confirmed and the actual realized
Execution’:
machine hours will be posted. In group ‘Production Planning and Execution

Select «More» and Confirmation > Enter > For operation > Time Ticket.
Enter at ‘Order’ the production order number. Press «Actual Data» to chec
Select «More» and Confirmation order data.>Choose
> Enter at ’Confirm.type’
For operation the ‘Final confirmation’. In the secti
> Time Ticket.
Yield put in 5 PC. In the section ‘Activities’ the actual wage hours and mach
Enter at ‘Order’ the production entered. The actual
order number. Presshours areData»
«Actual for both cases the
to check exceeded by 10 percent in re
production
calculated time. Enter 110 MIN (minutes) as machine time and 220 MIN fo
order data. Choose at ’Confirm.type’ the ‘Final confirmation’. In the section ‘Quantities’ at
« Save» the confirmation.
Yield put in 5 PC. In the section ‘Activities’ the actual wage hours and machine hours can
be entered. The actual hours are for both cases
14.16 exceeded
GOODS by 10 FINISHED
RECEIPT percent inPRODUCT
relation to FROM
the
pre-calculated time. Enter 110 MIN (minutes)PRODUCTION
as machine time and 220 MIN for labor.

The app for posting the goods receipt is in group ‘Production Planning and
« Save» the confirmation.

14.16 GOODS RECEIPT FINISHED PRODUCT FROM PRODUCTION


The app for posting the goods receipt is in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’: Part 2 Com plet e
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
127

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Order’. The order is the previously created pro
give «Enter».
At line 1 checkmark OK and enter at Sloc FG00 so the storage location
Goods’.

«Check» and 127


«Post» the goods receipt and note the number in the C-Busine
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Order’. The order is the previously created production order
and give «Enter».

At line 1 checkmark OK and enter at Sloc FG00 so the storage location will be ‘Finished
Goods’. Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Order’. The order is the previously created pro
give «Enter».
«Check» and «Post» the goods receipt
At line and note the OK
1 checkmark number and
in the C-Business
enter diagram.
at Sloc FG00 so the storage location
Goods’.
Monitor the result in the Stock/Requirements list for SB??? in plant HD00.
«Check» and «Post» the goods receipt and note the number in the C-Busine

Monitor the result in the Stock/Requirements list for SB??? in plant HD00.

14.17 CREATING A DELIVERY TO THE CUSTOMER


Part 2 Complete ERP Process
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
14.17
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES CREATING A Part
DELIVERY TO THE
2 Complete ERP CUSTOMER
Process
Now you have to create the delivery. Choose in group ‘Sales and Distribution’:
Now you have to create the delivery. Choose in group ‘Sales and Distributio

129

Give in the name of your customer and pre


Give in the name of your customer and press «Enter».
Click on at the end of the row with the sales order you are fulfilling and se
you are to deliver. With «Create Delivery». Confirm the pop up ‘Create Deli
Click on at the end of the row with«Refresh»
With the salesthe
order you are
number fulfilling
of the andis select
delivery the Note
displayed. item the number o
you are to deliver. With «Create Delivery».
Left belowConfirm the«Process
the screen pop up Flow»
‘Createshows
Delivery’ with «OK».
the current status of the order.

14.18
With «Refresh» the number of the delivery is THE DOCUMENT
displayed. FLOW
Note the AROUND
number THE SALES ORDER
of the delivery.
If you want to have an overview of the document flow, choose in group ‘Sa
Distribution’:
Left below the screen «Process Flow» shows the current status of the order.

128

128
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

14.18 THE DOCUMENT FLOW AROUND THE SALES ORDER


If you want to have an overview ofHANDS-ON
the document flow, choose in group ‘Sales and Distribution’:
WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Complete ERP Process

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Complete ERP Process

The number shows the open orders.

Give in
The number shows the open orders. the name of your customer and pre
Click on the blue ‘Overall Status’ of your order. The process with status is
Give in to the overview
the namewith
of «OK».
your customer and press «Enter».

Click on the blue ‘Overall Status’ of your


Click on order. Theright
at the process
of thewith status
order is displayed.
row to Return
see the complete order.
to the overview with «OK». By pressing the «Display document flow» a list of all the actions you have ca
As you see, all the numbers of the documents in the system are displayed. If
have forgotten
Click on at the right of the order row to seethethe
number of the
complete delivery, you can find it in this overview
order.

By pressing the «Display document


14.19 flow» a PICKING
list of allTHE
the DELIVERY
actions you have carried out
appears. As you see, all the numbers of the documents in the system are displayed. If you,
The five bicycles have to be picked from the warehouse. Warehouse 100 is c
for example, have forgotten the‘lean
number of the delivery,
warehouse’ you can
Order picking find it but
is posted, in this overview.
the storage locations and bins
To pick choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

14.19 PICKING THE DELIVERY


The five bicycles have to be picked from the warehouse. Warehouse 100 is customized
as a ‘lean warehouse’ Order picking is posted, but the storage locations and bins are not
registered. To pick choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

Click «All Selections» so that more selections are possible. Remove the Pi
down to Material Data and enter as Material the bike SB???. With «Execute
picked is displayed.
Select the delivery, choose «TO in Foreground» and give «Enter». Sel
to see the available quantity. At ‘Selected quantity’ you enter the 5 bikes to pi
the picking is done and the delivery is green.
Note the number of the transfer order.

129
14.19 PICKING THE DELIVERY
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA ANDThe
GBI five bicycles have to be picked from the warehouse.
Complete Warehouse 100 is c
ERP Process
‘lean warehouse’ Order picking is posted, but the storage locations and bins
To pick choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

Click «All Selections» so that more selections


Click are possible.
«All Selections» Remove
so that more the Pickingare
selections Dates. ScrollRemove the Pic
possible.
down to Material Data and enter downas to Material
Material theData
bikeand enterWith
SB???. as Material the bike
«Execute» SB???. With «Execute»
the delivery
to be picked is displayed. picked is displayed.
Select the delivery, choose «TO in Foreground» and give «Enter». Sele
Select the delivery, choose «TO in Foreground»quantity.
to see the available and giveAt«Enter».
‘Selected quantity’
Select youFigures»
«Stock enter the 5 bikes to pi
the picking is done and the delivery is green.
to see the available quantity. At ‘Selected quantity’ you enter the 5 bikes to pick. After
Note the number of the transfer order.
«Posting» the picking is done and the delivery is green.

Note the number of the transfer order.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e


129
14.20 GOODS ISSUE DELIVERY TO THE CUSTOMER
14.20 GOODS ISSUE DELIVERY TO THE CUSTOMER
To post the goods issue choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:
To post the goods issue choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

129

Give the delivery number (or find by ship to party / customer). After «Cont
Give the delivery number (or find
you by
canship
see onto the
party
tab/picking
customer). After
that the five«Continue(Enter)»
bicycles have been picked.
you can see on the tab picking Go
that«Back»
the five bicycles have been picked.
to the previous screen and «Post goods issue». The status of the
changed. Check the order process as done in 14.18.
Go «Back» to the previous screen and «Post goods issue». The status of the delivery is
14.21
changed. Check the order process as done in INVOICE
14.18. THE CUSTOMER
Create the invoice for the customer by choosing in group ‘Sales and Distrib

130
Give the delivery number (or find by ship to party / customer). After «Con
you can see on the tab picking that the five bicycles have been picked.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND Go GBI «Back» to the previous screen and Complete
«Post goods
ERP issue».
ProcessThe status of the
changed. Check the order process as done in 14.18.
Give the delivery number (or find by ship to party / customer). After «Cont
14.21 INVOICE THE CUSTOMER you can see on INVOICE
the tab picking that the five bicycles have been picked.
14.21 THEPart
CUSTOMER
2 Complete ERP Process
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
Go «Back»
Create the invoice for the customer to the previous
by choosing in groupscreen
‘Sales and
and «Post goods issue». The status of the
Distribution’:
Create theCheck
changed. invoice
thefor the process
order customer asby choosing
done in group ‘Sales and Distrib
in 14.18.

14.21 INVOICE THE CUSTOMER


Create the invoice for the customer by choosing in group ‘Sales and Distrib

The number shows the billing due deliveries.


The number shows the billing due deliveries.
Give in the name of your customer and pre
Give in the name of your customer and press «Enter».
Thenumber
The system shows
indicates
the the delivery
billing number due to be invoiced. Select
due deliveries. th
the invoice and «Save» the invoice. Write down the invoice number in the C
The system indicates the delivery number due to be invoiced. Select the delivery. «Create»
Give in the name of your customer and pre
the invoice and «Save» the invoice.The
Write downisthe
invoice invoice number
automatically in theby
processed C-Business
the systemdiagram.
in the financial accoun
The system
controlling. indicates the delivery number due to be invoiced. Select th
the invoicebyand
The invoice is automatically processed «Save»
the the in
system invoice. Write down
the financial the invoice
accounting number in the C
and
controlling. The billing document can be shown with:
The invoice is automatically processed by the system in the financial accoun
controlling.
The billing document can be shown with:
The billing document can be shown with:

130

129

130

Type the number of the invoice you just created and stay in this screen (don’t press Enter).

With «Accounting» you will see the financial documents. If the journal entry has not yet
been created, with «Release to Accounting» it will. If there are errors again, check the export
data in your invoice.

131
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process


Type the number of the invoice you just created and stay in this screen (don

With «Accounting» you will see the financial documents. If the journal ent
It will be displayed with «More» and Billing document > Issue Output To. The output type
created, with «Release to Accounting» it will. If there are errors again, check
is RD00. Use «Print preview» your to invoice.
display the invoice. Make sure the invoice is complete
and correct. Write down the amount the customer will pay in case he will pay today and
It will be displayed with «More» and Billing document > Issue Output To.
takes the discount that is allowed.
RD00. Use «Print preview» to display the invoice. Make sure the invo
correct. Write down the amount the customer will pay in case he will pay t
discount that is allowed.
14.22 INCOMING PAYMENT FROM THE CUSTOMER
14.22 INCOMING PAYMENT FROM THE CUSTOMER
The accounting department posts the incoming payment in group ‘Financial Accounting’:
The accounting department posts the incoming payment in group ‘Financia

132

You can post the receipt of payment of the invoice that has just been create
General
You can post the receipt of payment of Information
the invoice that has just been created.
Company Code DE00
General Information Posting Date <Today>
Journal Entry Date <Today>
Journal Entry Type DZ (Customer Payment)
Company Code DE00
Bank Data
Posting Date G/L Account
<Today> 100000
Amount <Amount noted previous paragraph> EUR
Journal Entry Date <Today>
Open Item Selection
Journal Entry Type AccountDZ (CustomerID
Type/Account Payment)Find customer by search term <your
The open items are displayed with «Propose Items».

Bank Data Top right on your screen the balance is displayed.

Choose the right item with . The balance must be zero.


G/L Account «Post»100000
the incoming payment and note this last number of document in the C
Leave the transaction with «Post next payment».
Amount <Amount noted previous paragraph> EUR
Look at the document flow as you did in paragraph 14.18.

14.23 TRACKING AND TRACING


The material documents and the financial documents can be analyzed.
Create a list with the material documents, the financial documents and the
131

132
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Open Item Selection

Account Type/Account ID Find customer by search term <your name>

The open items are displayed with «Propose Items».

Top right on your screen the balance is displayed.

Choose the right item with . The balance must be zero.

«Post» the incoming payment and note this last number of document in the C-Business
diagram. Leave the transaction with «Post next payment».

Look at the document flow as you did in paragraph 14.18.

14.23 TRACKING AND TRACING


The material documents and the financial documents can be analyzed.

Create a list with the material documents, the financial documents and the paragraph where
they were created.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Part 2 Com plet e

they were created.


14.23.1 MATERIAL DOCUMENTS
14.23.1Material documents
The logistical material documents can be listed in group ‘Materials Management’ via:
The logistical material documents can be listed in group ‘Materials Managem
133

Make the selection:


Stock Change All
Material document Year <This year>
Material SB???
133

The list is displayed with «Go».


they were created.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process


14.23.1Material documents

Make the selection: The logistical material documents can be listed in group ‘Materials Managem

Stock Change All

Material document Year <This year>

Material SB???

The list is displayed with «Go».

Make the selection:


Click on the document number to see the details.
Stock Change All
Material document Year <This year>
Some material documents are financially Material
posted as well. Click on a material
SB??? document item
to show the accounting document, by choosing the tab ‘General Information’ and scroll
down to the ‘Process Flow’. The list is displayed with «Go».
Click on the document number to see the details.
Write down in a list in Word orSome material
Excel documents
the material are financially
document numbersposted as well.
and the Click on a material
numbers
show the accounting document, by choosing the tab ‘General Information
of the paragraph they were created.
to the ‘Process Flow’.

Do the same for FR??? and WL???. Add


Write the document
down numbers
in a list in Word and the
or Excel the paragraph numbersnumbers and th
material document
in which they were created to the list.
paragraph they were created.

Do the same for FR??? and WL???. Add the document numbers and the pa
in which they were created to the list.
14.23.2 FINANCIAL DOCUMENTS
14.23.2Financial
The financial material documents can be listed indocuments
group ‘Financial Accounting’ via:
The financial material documents can be listed in group ‘Financial Accounti

Make the selection:


Company Code DE00
Fiscal Year <This year>
132

134
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Complete ERP Process

Make the selection:

Company Code DE00

Fiscal Year <This year>

Click on «Adapt Filters». Choose within the ‘Administrative Data’ «More Filters(4)». Select
‘JE Created By’ and «OK». Enter as ‘JE Created By’ <Your user code>. With «Go» the
financial documents that you created will be listed.

By clicking on the blue number and ‘Manage Journal Entry’ at the header data you can
see who created this journal entry. When there are ‘ Related Documents’, the first on the
list was the reason for the financial posting.

Add these financial document numbers to your list and complete the list with the paragraph
numbers in which they were created.

135
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Special Applications

PART 3: SPECIAL APPLICATIONS


15. Fixed assets
16. Repair order
17. Production on stock and forecast based planning
18. Product costing

In part three some special applications are described. The management of fixed assets will
be reviewed in chapter 15. In chapter 16 controlling will be illustrated by an internal order
that is used as a temporary cost center. Chapter 17 focuses on production on stock and
forecast based planning. Product costing is examined in chapter 18.

136
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Fixed Assets

15 FIXED ASSETS
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4 AND IDES fIxed assets

In this chapter fixed assets management is introduced. You will create the master data and
15 FIXED ASSETS
carry out the acquisition of the fixed asset. The results can be shown with the use of the
‘360 view on assets’.

In this chapter fixed assets management is introduced. You will create the master data and
carry out the acquisition of the fixed asset. The results can be shown with the use of the ‘360
view on assets’.
15.1 C BUSINESS DIAGRAM ACQUISITION
15.1 C BUSINESS
OF FIXED DIAGRAM
ASSETS ACQUISITION
SCENARIO OF FIXED ASSETS
You willSCENARIO
create the master data and acquire the fixed asset. The procedure for posting the
You will create
purchasing the of
invoice master data is
the asset and acquirefrom
different the fixed asset. Thefor
the procedure procedure for invoice
posting an postingofthea
purchasing invoice
purchasing material.ofThe
the invoice
asset is will
different from the
be assigned procedure
to the for posting
fixed asset. an invoice
The outgoing of a
payment
purchasing
will material.
be posted. The invoice
The process can will be assigned
be managed to the
with the fixed
use ofasset.
the The
assetoutgoing
explorer.payment will
be posted. The process can be managed with the use of the asset explorer.
The C-Business diagram in Figure 15.1 shows the acquisition of the fixed asset.
The C-Business diagram in Figure 15.1 shows the acquisition of the fixed asset.

Figure 15.1
Figure 15.1C-Business diagram
C-Business acquisition
diagram of fixed
acquisition ofasset
fixed asset

15.2 CREATE FIXED ASSET


First the asset has to be created. We are going to create the fixed asset production machine
of the type Bike assembly machine ???. Machines are administered in class 2000, Production,
Machinery, Equipment and Fixtures. Pressing «Enter» will in every case take us to the next
screen. Register the asset as follows in group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’:

137
15.2 CREATE FIXED ASSET
First the asset has to be created. We are going to create the fixed asset produ
the type Bike assembly machine ???. Machines are administered in class 2
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Fixed Assets
Machinery, Equipment and Fixtures. Pressing «Enter» will in every case ta
screen. Register the asset as follows in group ‘Enterprise Asset Managemen

Asset class 2000


Asset class 2000
Company code
Company code DE00 DE00
Number of similar assets 1
Number of similar assets 1

Press «Master data» to go to the ‘Create Asset: Master data’ screen. At ‘G


description ‘Bike assembly machine ???’. At the ‘Time dependent’ details fil
Press «Master data» to go to thecenter
‘Create Asset: Master
is EUPR1000 data’ screen.
(Production At ‘General’ enter the
Costs).
description ‘Bike assembly machine ???’. At the ‘Time dependent’ details fill in that the cost
center is EUPR1000 (Production ForCosts).
the tab ‘Origin’:

For the tab ‘Origin’: Vendor With search term <your name>
Asset purch. new
Org. Acquis. Year [current ear]
Vendor Original
With Value
search term €48.000
<your name>

Asset purch. newAt the tab ‘Deprec. Areas’ both depreciation areas should be LINR, lin
(‘UseLife’). «Save»
Org. Acquis. Year
the fixed asset. Write down the number of the fixed assets
[current ear]
diagram.
Original Value €48.000

At the tab ‘Deprec. Areas’ both depreciation areas should be LINR, linear over 5 years
(‘UseLife’). «Save» the fixed asset. Write down the number of the fixed assets in the
C-Business diagram.

15.3 REGISTERING THE PURCHASE


A vendor is required to create a purchase order. The vendor was already mentioned when
the fixed asset was entered.
132

138
assets

15.3 REGISTERING THE PURCHASE


HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA ANDAGBI
vendor is required to create a purchase order. The vendor
Fixed Assetswas already me

fixed asset was entered.


The incoming invoice has to be posted in group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’:
The incoming invoice has to be posted in group ‘Enterprise Asset Managem

You are working for company DE00.


You arePress «Continue(Enter)».
working for company DE00. Press «Continue(Enter)».
Enter the current date as the document date. The Doc.Header Text is ‘Pu
Machine’. date. The Doc.Header Text is ‘Purchase Assembly
Enter the current date as the document
Machine’.
At the bottom of the screen you enter posting key (PstKy) 31 (creditor credit
The account is your supplier, can be found by search term <your name>. Pres
At the bottom of the screen you enter posting key (PstKy) 31 (creditor credit posting, invoice)
The account is your supplier, can be found by search term <your name>. Press «Enter».
The amount posted is 57.120 EUR. The text is ‘Purch. Ass. Mach. ???’.
calculated automatically ( Calculate tax).
The amount posted is 57.120 EUR. The text is ‘Purch. Ass. Mach. ???’. The tax must be
calculated automatically ( Calculate tax).
The ‘Next line item’ is a debit posting on a fixed asset. The posting key i
number to be entered is the number (without the series number) of the fix
The ‘Next line item’ is a debit posting on a fixed asset. The posting key is 70, the account
created. (without
number to be entered is the number Enter thethe
number
seriesfrom the previous
number) of the paragraph
fixed asset(or find the number
you
and classess and enter ??? as name) as the existing asset. The asset transaction ty
have created. Enter the number from the previous paragraph (or find the number with
is 100. Press «Enter».
, names and classess and enter ??? as name) as the existing asset. The asset transaction type
trans ((TType) is 100. Press «Enter».
The offsetting account must be posted with the same amount, this can be d
for this amount. The tax must be calculated automatically (Calculate tax) usi
The offsetting account must be posted with the same amount, this can be done by entering *
for this amount. The tax must beCheck the posting
calculated as a whole
automatically choosing
(Calculate «Display
tax) using Document
tax code V1. Overview».
amount to be paid to the vendor (what is the cash discount?). The posting o
taken place on both sides; the invoice is balanced.
Check the posting as a whole choosing «Display Document Overview». Write down the
amount to be paid to the vendor (what is the cash discount?). The posting of the account
«Post» the vendor invoice. Make a note of the document number in Figure
has taken place on both sides; the invoice is balanced.
The system expects you to post the next invoice. You can therefore only
«Post» the vendor invoice. Make a note«Exit»
through of theand
document
by givingnumber in Figure
an affirmative 15.1.to the question of wheth
answer
to stop.
The system expects you to post the next invoice. You can therefore only leave this screen
through «Exit» and by giving an affirmative answer to the question of whether you really
want to stop.

139
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Fixed Assets

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

15.4 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE


15.4 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE
The outgoing payment by the is bank is done. Post the outgoing payment from the
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
Deutsche Bank (ledger numberThe outgoing
100000) with payment by the of
a deduction is bank is done.
3% cash Post theUse
discount. outgoing
in payment fr
group ‘Financial Accounting’: Bank
15.4
(ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in
PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE
Accounting’:
The outgoing payment by the is bank is done. Post the outgoing payment fr
Bank (ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in
Accounting’:

The company code is DE00. For Thethe Postingcode


company Dateis and
DE00. Journal
For theEntry DateDate
Posting enter
andtoday’s
Journal Entry Date
date. The Bank Data G/L account requested is 100000. The amount including
The Bank Data G/L account requested is 100000. The amount the 3% including th
discount was written down in thewritten downparagraph.
previous in the previous
Openparagraph. Open with
items selection itemsAccount
selection with Accoun
and
type ‘Supplier’ and for Account ID for
Theenter Account
company<yourcode IDisenter
name> and<your
DE00. name>
For on
click thethe and click
Posting
right Date on
andthe
supplier. right supplier.
Journal
With Wit
Entry Date
the
The open
Bank items
Data for
G/L this
«Show items» the open items for this supplier are displayed. supplier
account are displayed.
requested is 100000. The amount including th
written down in the previous paragraph. Open items selection with Accoun
Select
and forthe open item
Account to be <your
ID enter clearedname>
with «Clear >> ».on the right supplier. Wi
and click
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
the open items for this supplier are displayed.
Check the balance at the right top of the screen. It should be zero in green.
Check the balance at the right the
topdiscount.
Select ofthetheopen
screen.
item Itto should
«Simulate» be be zero
thecleared
posting with inwhen
green.
and«Clear >> Check
».
everything the
looks fine « Post»
discount. «Simulate» the postingpayment.
and when everything looks fine «Post» the payment. Make
Make a note of the posting number in the C-Business diagram.
a note of the posting number inCheck the balancediagram.
the C-Business at the right top of the screen. It should be zero in green.
the discount. «Simulate» the posting and when everything looks fine « Post»
payment.
15.5 360 Make
VIEW a note
ON of the posting number in the C-Business diagram.
ASSET
The asset can be displayed by choosing in group ‘Enterprise Asset Managem
15.5 360 VIEW ON ASSET
15.5 360 VIEW ON ASSET
The asset can be displayed by choosing in group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’:
The asset can be displayed by choosing in group ‘Enterprise Asset Managem

The company code is DE00. The fixed asset can be selected with «possible
‘Names and classes’ tab, company code DE00. Select the ‘Bike assembly mac
created. At the ‘Planned values’ tab you see the acquisition value and the plan
Also look at thecode
The company ‘Posted values’
is DE00. Thetab.fixed
Theasset
depreciation can be performed
can be selected at
with «possible
period
‘Namesby using
and the tab,
classes’ automated
company depreciation
code DE00.run.Select the ‘Bike assembly mac
created. At the ‘Planned values’ tab you see the acquisition value and the plan
Also look at 140
the ‘Posted values’ tab. The depreciation can be performed at
period by using the automated depreciation run.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Fixed Assets

The company code is DE00. The fixed asset can be selected with «possible entries». Use
the ‘Names and classes’ tab, company code DE00. Select the ‘Bike assembly machine ???’
you have created. At the ‘Planned values’ tab you see the acquisition value and the planned
depreciation. Also look at the ‘Posted values’ tab. The depreciation can be performed at the
end of a given period by HANDS-ON
using the WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
automated depreciation run. F
a

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

15.6 DEPRECIATION
15.6 DEPRECIATION
Run the depreciation for the ‘Bike Assembly Machine ???’ First carry out the tests run.
After a successful test run, the Rundepreciation
real the depreciation forexecuted,
will be the ‘Bike in
Assembly Machine ???’
group ‘Enterprise First carry out the
Asset
Management’ successful test run, the real depreciation will be executed, in group
Management’

Create a new job with


Create a new job with

Job Template Depreciation Posting Run


Job Template JobDepreciation
Name Posting RunDepreciation Posting Run ??? Test

Job Name Depreciation Posting Run ??? Test


At ‘Scheduling Options’, select Start Immediately .
At ‘Scheduling Options’, select Start Immediately .
At ‘Parameters’, the posting parameters:

At ‘Parameters’, the posting parameters:


Company Code DE00
Fiscal Year [Current year]
Company Code Posting period DE00 [Current month]

For
Fiscal Year ‘Test Run Parameters’
[Current year]

Posting periodTest Run [Current month]


Asset [Your asset number]
For ‘Options’ choose ‘Totals Log’.

Carry out the depreciation run with «Schedule». The status is now ‘In Proce
Type in Search ‘???’ and press «Go» to refresh.
A status ‘Finished’ indicates that the job is ready. By clicking on the log
to the job log.
141
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Fixed Assets

For ‘Test Run Parameters’

Test Run

Asset [Your asset number]

For ‘Options’ choose ‘Totals Log’.

Carry out the depreciation run with «Schedule». The status is now ‘In Process’.

Type in Search ‘???’ and press «Go» to refresh.


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES F
a
A status ‘Finished’ indicates that the job is ready. By clicking on the log you can navigate
to the job log.

If an error is reported then transactions 15.3 and 15.4 are not done properly. If the
depreciation test is good, we are going to carry out the real depreciation in group ‘Enterprise
Asset Management’ HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Create a new job with Create a new job with

Job Template JobDepreciation


Template Posting RunDepreciation Posting Run
Job Name Depreciation Posting Run ??? Real
Job Name Depreciation Posting Run ??? Real

At ‘Scheduling Options’, select Start Immediately .

At ‘Scheduling Options’, select At


Start Immediately
‘Parameters’, .
the posting parameters:

Company Code DE00


Fiscal Year [Current year]
Posting period [Current month]

For ‘Test Run Parameters’

Test Run (Deselected)


142
Asset [Your asset number]
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Fixed Assets

At ‘Parameters’, the posting parameters:

Company Code DE00

Fiscal Year [Current year]

Posting period [Current month]

For ‘Test Run Parameters’

Test Run (Deselected)

Asset [Your asset number]

For ‘Options’ choose ‘Totals Log’.

Carry out the depreciation run with «Schedule». The status is now ‘In Process’.

Type in Search ‘???’ and press «Go» to refresh.

A status ‘Finished’ indicates that the job is ready. By clicking on the log you can navigate
to the job log.

Check the depreciations with the 360 View on Assets according to the instructions of
section 15.5.

143
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

16 REPAIR ORDER
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance order

The Bike assembly machine ??? you created in chapter 15 as a fixed asset will be created as

16 REPAIR ORDER
an equipment. This equipment needs to be repaired. The gear box needs to be replaced. A
malfunction report will start the maintenance process. Costs of Labor will be estimated. After
the replacement TheofBike
the assembly
gear box machine
the assembly machine
??? you created needs to tested.
in chapter 15 as aThe
fixedmaintenance
asset will be created as an
order starts theequipment. This equipment needs to be repaired. The gear box needslabor
external operations of procurement of new gear box and internal to be replaced. A
activities of replacement
malfunctionand testing.
report Thethe
will start planned and actual
maintenance repair
process. costs
Costs of of the will
Labor internal
be estimated. After
the replacement
activities and material of thewill
replacement gearbe
box the assembly
posted machine needs
in the maintenance to tested.
order. The maintenance order
The technical
starts the external operations of procurement of new gear box and
completion is set when the repair is completed. Cost analyses of maintenance is carried out internal labor activities of
replacement
and the costs will andBusiness
be settled. testing. completion
The planned and
will beactual
set. repair costs of the internal activities and
material replacement will be posted in the maintenance order. The technical completion is set
when the repair is completed. Cost analyses of maintenance is carried out and the costs will be
settled. Business completion will be set.

16.1 C-BUSINESS DIAGRAM


16.1 C-BUSINESS INTERNAL
DIAGRAM ORDER
INTERNAL ORDER PROCESSING
PROCESSING
The C-businessThe
diagram is described
C-business diagraminis Figure 16.1.
described in Figure 16.1.

Figure
Figure 16.1 C-Business
16.1 C-Business diagram
diagram internal
internal order
order processing
processing

144
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES


16.2 EQUIPMENT MASTER DATA
The Bike assembly machine ??? 16.2 EQUIPMENT
you created MASTER
in chapter 15 as a DATA
fixed asset will be created as
an equipment. Sometimes several equipment’s are financial posted as one fixed asset (with
sub numbers). The Bike assembly machine ??? you created in chapter 15 as a fixed asset wi
equipment. Sometimes several equipment’s are financial posted as one fixe
numbers).
Create the equipment in group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’ with:
Create the equipment in group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’ with:

Go to create with «More -> Equipment -> Create».


Valid On [Today]
Equipment
Go to create with «More -> Equipment category
-> Create». M (Machines)
Give «Enter» to continue.

Valid On [Today]
The Description is ‘Bike assembly machine ???’.
Equipment category M (Machines)
At tab ‘Location’:
MaintPlant HD00
Work center WC???
Give «Enter» to continue. Give «Enter» to check.

The Description is ‘Bike assembly machine


At tab ???’.
‘Organization’:
Company Code DE00 (was filled by the maintenance plant)
At tab ‘Location’: Asset [Your Asset number from chapter 15,

(or find with , names and classess and enter ??? as n


MaintPlantCost Center EUPR1000
HD00

Planning
Work center Plant HD00 (was filled by the maintenance plant)
WC???
Planner Group P00
Main WorkCtr MANT1000 / HD00
Give «Enter» to check. Give «Enter» to check.

At tab ‘Structure’ click on «Change InstLoc» .


The function loc. is HD00-S-SHFL1000. «Confirm»
The Position is ???.

«Save» the equipment and note the number.

145
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

At tab ‘Organization’:

Company Code DE00 (was filled by the maintenance plant)

Asset [Your Asset number from chapter 15,


(or find with , names and classess and enter ??? as name)

Cost Center EUPR1000

Planning Plant HD00 (was filled by the maintenance plant

Planner Group P00

Main WorkCtr MANT1000 / HD00

Give «Enter» to check.

At tab ‘Structure’ click on «Change InstLoc» .

The function loc. is HD00-S-SHFL1000. «Confirm»

The Position is ???.

«Save» the equipment and note the number. 138

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES M

16.3 CREATE MALFUNCTION REPORT


16.3 CREATE MALFUNCTION REPORT
To create the Malfunction report go to group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’
To create the Malfunction report go to group ‘Enterprise Asset Managemen

In the description field for the Notification enter: ‘Gear box making unusual

At tab ‘Notification’ at ‘Reference Object’ enter as Equipment the equipme


16.2. This number can be found by ‘Equipment by asset number’ and give yo
With «Enter» 146
other fields are filled based on the equipment master data.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

In the description field for the Notification enter: ‘Gear box making unusual noises ???’

At tab ‘Notification’ at ‘Reference Object’ enter as Equipment the equipment you created
in 16.2. This number can be found by ‘Equipment by asset number’ and give your asset
number. With «Enter» other fields are filled based on the equipment master data.

At ‘Subject’ enter:

Coding VW1 0001 (Assembly Processing)

Description Gear box making unusual noises ???

At ‘Responsibilities’ enter:

Reported by [your user code]

Next at tab ‘Items’ enter:

Sub tab ‘Items’

Code Group GEAR

Object part 1001 (Engine)

Code Group GEAR

Damage Code 1004 (Unusual Noises)

Sub tab ‘Causes’

Code Group PM-2000

Cause code 1004 (Normal Wear and Tear)

Cause Text Intensive usage

147
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

Sub tab ‘Activities’ and enter on the fist line:

Code Group PM01

Activity Code 2 (Replacement (Spare))

Activity Text Replacement Gear Box

«Save» the malfunction report. Write down the notification number.

16.4 INFO RECORD


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance
To replace and procure the Gear Box for the Bike assembly machine you have to create an
order
info record. 16.4 INFO RECORD
To replace and procure the Gear Box for the Bike assembly machine you have to cr
To create the info, use in group ‘Materials Management’:
To create the info, use in group ‘Materials Management’:

Use the vendor/supplier you created with name Supplier <your name>.
Use the vendor/supplier you created with name Supplier <your name>. You can find the
vendor with and search the vender at the tab ‘Suppliers (General) by the s
vendor with and search the vender at the tab ‘Suppliers (General) by the search term
name>.
<your name>.
Material Z-110
Material Purchasing Org. Z-110 DE00
Plant
Purchasing Org. DE00 HD00
This is a standard info record. Press «Enter».
Plant
At HD00no data need to be filled in here.
the ‘General data’ screen;
Using «Purch. Org. data 1» enter the planned delivery time as 1 day. The pu
E00 and the standard quantity is 1 piece. Further down the screen enter
4500.«Enter».
This is a standard info record. Press «Save» the info record.

16.5 CREATE MAINTENANCE ORDER

The maintenance Order will be created out of the Malfunction report.


‘Enterprise Asset
148 Management’ and select:
Use the vendor/supplier you created with name Supplier <your name>. Y

vendor with and search the vender at the tab ‘Suppliers (General) by the se
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA ANDname>.
GBI Repair Order

Material
At the ‘General data’ screen; no data need to be filled in here. Z-110
Purchasing Org. DE00
Using «Purch. Org. data 1» enter the planned
Plant delivery time as 1 day. The purchasing HD00group
is E00 and the standard quantity is is
This 1 apiece. Further
standard info down
record.the screen
Press enter the net price as
«Enter».
€ 4500. «Save» the info record.At the ‘General data’ screen; no data need to be filled in here.
Using «Purch. Org. data 1» enter the planned delivery time as 1 day. The pu
E00 and the standard quantity is 1 piece. Further down the screen enter th
4500. «Save» the info record.
16.5 CREATE MAINTENANCE ORDER
16.5 CREATE MAINTENANCE ORDER
The maintenance Order will be created out of the Malfunction report. Go to the group
‘Enterprise Asset Management’The
and maintenance
select: Order will be created out of the Malfunction report. G
‘Enterprise Asset Management’ and select:

A new entry screen is opened with «More -> Maintenance notification -> Ch
A new entry screen is opened with «More -> Maintenance notification -> Change».
A pop message appears, answer the question with ‘NO’
Search for you notification by using at description *??? Give «Enter»
A pop message appears, answernotification.
the question with ‘NO’
Give «Enter» again. The notification is shown and the notification status OSN
Search for WITH
HANDS-ON you SAP
notification by using at description *??? Give «Enter» and
ERP AND IDES 140
select your
Maintenance
order
notification.

Give «Enter» again. The notification is shown and the notification status OSNO (Outstanding
notification). Besides the field Order click on «Create» . A new window appears, enter:

Order Type PM01

Planning Plant HD00

Business Area BI00

Main Work Center MANT1000/HD00 (Maintenance)

149
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

Go to the tab ‘Operations’.

At line ‘OpAc’ 0010 replace the ‘Operation short text’ by ‘Gear box replacement
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
???’
Maintenance
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance
order
order

Replacement time is estimated to be 2 hours:

Work 2

Un (unit) H

Number 1

Dur.(duration) 2

Un (unit) H

CKey Calculate duration

ActType MLABOR

Open another operation by selecting line ‘OpAc’ 0020.

Operation short text ‘Bike assembly machine testing ???’

Testing time is estimated to be 45 minutes

Work 45

Un (unit) MIN

Number 1

Dur.(duration) 45

Un (unit) MIN

CKey Calculate duration

ActType MLABOR

Mark operation line ‘OpAc’ 010 and choose «External»

Give «Enter»

150
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

At the subtab ‘Components’, ’Gen. Data’ enter at line item 0010:

Component Z-110

Reqmt Qty 1

IC N

Plant HD00

At the subtab ‘Components’, ’Purch’ enter:

Info record [Created in 16.4]

Push «Enter» to check if all the data is entered correct and ignore the information with
«Continue». « Save» the order. Write down the maintenance order number.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance
order

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES


16.6 RELEASE MAINTENANCE ORDER
16.6 RELEASE MAINTENANCE ORDER
The maintenance Order will be released. Go to the group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’
and select: The maintenance Order will be released. Go to the group ‘Enterprise Asset
select:

Give the maintenance order number or find the number by ‘Advanced Sear
usingorEnterprise
Give the maintenance order number Search’ by
find the number and‘Advanced
put ??? inSearch
the search field.
for PM «Enter» the order.
Orders
using Enterprise Search’ and put ??? in the search field. «Enter» the order.
Click on the button «Release» and «Save» the order.
Click on the button «Release» and «Save» the order.
16.7 ORDERING MATERIALS FOR INTERNAL USE

Materials are required to repair the Bike assembly machine. The requir
financially be posted directly on the cost account instead to the inventory a
step, a purchase order is generated for the necessary materials by cho
Management’:
151
Give the maintenance order number or find the number by ‘Advanced Sear
using Enterprise Search’ and put ??? in the search field. «Enter» the order.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

Click on the button «Release» and «Save» the order.


16.7 ORDERING MATERIALS FOR INTERNAL USE
Materials are required to repair16.7 ORDERING
the Bike assemblyMATERIALS FORrequired
machine. The INTERNAL USE will
materials
financially be posted directly on the cost account instead to the inventory account. As a
Materials are required to repair the Bike assembly machine. The requir
first step, a purchase order is generated forbethe
financially necessary
posted materials
directly on the by
costchoosing
account ‘instead
Materials
to the inventory a
Management’: step, a purchase order is generated for the necessary materials by cho
Management’:

Enter in the field ‘Supplier’ [Supplier <your name>] and «Execute».

Enter in the field ‘Supplier’ [Supplier <your name>] and «Execute».


Open Assignments and select your supplier.
Open Assignments Open theand
Item Overview
select and select the purchase requisition for the Z-110.
your supplier.

«Create purchase order» . Now select the purchase requisition in the lef
Open the Item Overview and select the purchase requisition for the Z-110.
basket .
«Create purchase order» . Now select the purchase
Ignore the message requisition
and «Save» in the left
the purchase window
order. Noteinto
the number.
the basket .

142
Ignore the message and «Save» the purchase142 order. Note the number.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP14ERP
2 AND IDES

Check if the details of the purchase order you just created is correct with group
142 ‘Materials
Check if the details of the purchase order you just created is correct with
Management’: Management’:

Check on the item level of the order if ‘F’ (order). at column A is set .

Go to the item-detail screen and select the tab ‘Account assignment’. Che
the correct maintenance order is assigned.
152
16.8 GOODS RECEIPT FROM A SUPPLIER
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

Check on the item level of the order if ‘F’ (order). at column A is set .

Go to the item-detail screen and select the tab ‘Account assignment’. Check and notice that
the correct maintenance order is assigned.
Check on the item level of the order if ‘F’ (order). at column A is set .

Go to the item-detail screen and select the tab ‘Account assignment’. Chec
the correct maintenance order is assigned.
16.8 GOODS RECEIPT FROM A SUPPLIER
16.8 GOODS RECEIPT FROM A SUPPLIER
Post the goods receipt in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:
Post the goods receipt in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase Order’. Enter the purchase order n
next on the right of the ‘Purchase order’ field.
Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase Order’. Enter the purchase order number in the field
In case you did not note the number, the purchase order can be found with
next on the right of the ‘Purchase
tab order’ field. documents per Supplier’ and enter the number of the vend
‘ Purchasing
the number). «Find» and double click the right PO number.
In case you did not note the number, the purchase order can be found with , choose
Give «Enter» to display the purchase order.
the tab ‘ Purchasing documents per Supplier’ and enter the number of the vender (or search
for the number). «Find» and double click the right PO number.
«Close Detail Data» with halfway down on the left side in the main scre
a «Check» and «Post» the receipt of the goods. Write down the goods receipt
Give «Enter» to display the purchase order.
Business diagram.

«Close Detail Data» with halfway down on the left side in the main screen. Select OK,
do a «Check» and «Post» the receipt of the goods. Write down the goods receipt number
in the C-Business diagram.

16.9 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM


143 THE SUPPLIER 143
143

The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Management’:

153
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI 16.9 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE
Repair SUPPLIER
Order

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance


The app for posting the receipt of the invoices order
is in group ‘Materials Manag

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance order

16.9 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER


The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Management’:

When asked, give as the company code DE00 and «Continue (Enter)».
Enter
When asked, give as the company theDE00
code current
anddate as the invoice
«Continue date and as the posting date. At ‘amou
(Enter)».
€ 5.355,00. Enter the currency EUR in the field next to the amount. Activa
Enter the current date as the invoice date and as the posting. The date.VAT
At ‘amount’ enter
is V1 (19% domestic input tax).
Select the tab ‘PO Reference’.
When asked, give as the company code DE00 and «Continue (Enter)».
€ 5.355,00. Enter the currency EUR in the field next to the amount. Activate ‘Calculate
tax’ Enter the current date as the invoice date and
. The VAT as the
is V1 posting
(19% date. At ‘amount’
domestic enter
input tax).
€ 5.355,00. Enter the currency EUR in the field next to the amount. Activate ‘Calculate tax’

Select the tab ‘PO Reference’. . The VAT is V1 (19% domestic input tax).
Select the tab ‘PO Reference’.

Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, se
number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections
Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right s
and select the number of the purchase order and click on «Copy».)
Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, search for the order
number in the middle of the screen
Presswith the entry options. In the ‘Selections for theappear
Purchasing the screen.
Enter the purchase order number. (If«Enter» and
you don’t the purchase
know the PO order details
number, search on
for the
Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right supplier. «Execute»
order number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections for
and select the number of the purchase
In the order tab,
‘Payment’ and click
enteronthe
«Copy».)
current date as the ‘Baseline date’ and 000
the Purchasing Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.
supplier. «Execute»
Press andtheselect
«Enter» and the number
purchase order of the
details appear on purchase
the screen.order and click on «Copy».)

In the ‘Payment’ tab, enter theCalculate andaswrite


current date down the
the ‘Baseline date’amount toasbethepaid
and 0003 to the vendor, taking in
payment
Press «Enter» and the purchase order details
conditions. Use «Simulate» to discount appear on the
of 3%. of the posting.
obtain an overview screen.

In the Calculate
‘Payment’ andtab,
write downthe
enter «Post»
amountthe
thecurrent invoice
to be
date thetoand
aspaid thenote the
vendor,
‘Baseline number
taking
date’ in the
andin0003 asC-Business
account the cash
the diagram.
payment
discount of 3%.
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.
16.10 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE
«Post» the invoice and note the number in the C-Business diagram.
The outgoing
Calculate and write down the amount payment
to be paid to thebyvendor,
the is bank is done.
taking Post the
in account the outgoing
cash payment f
16.10
discount of 3%. PAYMENT OF THE
Bank SUPPLIER’S
(ledger INVOICE
number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in
Accounting’:
The outgoing payment by the is bank is done. Post the outgoing payment from the Deutsche
«Post» Bank (ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in group ‘Financial
the invoice and note the number in the C-Business diagram.
Accounting’:

141

144

144

154
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

16.10 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE


The outgoing payment by the is bank is done. Post the outgoing payment from the
Deutsche Bank (ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in
group ‘Financial Accounting’: HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

The company code is DE00. For Thethe


company
Postingcode
Dateis and
DE00. For the
Journal Posting
Entry DateDate andtoday’s
enter Journal Entry Date
date. The Bank Data G/L account Therequested
Bank Datais G/L account
100000. The requested is 100000.
amount was writtenThe
downamount
in was written
previous paragraph. Open items selection with Account type ‘Supplier’ and
the previous paragraph. Open items selection with Account type ‘Supplier’ and for Account
enter <your name> and click on the right supplier. With «Show items» the
ID enter <your name> and click on the right supplier. With «Show items» the open items
supplier are displayed.
for this supplier are displayed.
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
Check the balance at the right top of the screen. It should be zero in green.
Check the balance at the right the
topdiscount. «Simulate»
of the screen. the posting
It should andinwhen
be zero everything
green. looks fine « Post»
Check the
discount. «Simulate» the postingpayment.
and when Make a note of
everything the fine
looks posting number
«Post» in the C-Business
the payment. Make diagram.
a note of the posting number in the C-Business diagram.
16.11 OVERALL COMPLETION CONFIRMATION
The maintenance Order is finished and can be confirmed. Go to the group
16.11 Management’
OVERALL COMPLETION and select:
CONFIRMATION
The maintenance Order is finished and can be confirmed. Go to the group ‘Enterprise Asset
Management’ and select:

Select «More -> Extras -> Settings». Choose as profile 1 ( Maintenance wi


and «Save».

At the field ‘Order’ enter your maintenance order number. The activity
«Enter». The confirm overview is shown.
155
The actual labor time spend for the replacement is 2,5 hours.
16.11 OVERALL COMPLETION CONFIRMATION
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

The maintenance Order is finished and can be confirmed. Go to the group


Management’ and select:

Select «More -> Extras -> Settings». Choose as profile 1 ( Maintenance wi


and «Save».
Select «More -> Extras -> Settings». Choose as profile 1 ( Maintenance with order number)
and «Save».
At the field ‘Order’ enter your maintenance order number. The activity
«Enter». The confirm overview is shown.
At the field ‘Order’ enter your maintenance order number. The activity is 0010 and press
«Enter». The confirm overview is shown.
The actual labor time spend for the replacement is 2,5 hours.
Enter at ‘Time confirmation’:
Act. Work’
The actual labor time spend for the replacement is 2,5 hours. 2,5
Fin…(Final Conf.) select
«Save» the confirmation.
Enter at ‘Time confirmation’:
145

Act. Work’ 2,5

Fin…(Final Conf.) select

«Save» the confirmation.

Repeat this step for activity 0020. The actual labor hours spent for testing is 66 minutes.

16.12 ANALYSE COST AND TECHNICAL COMPLETION


The maintenance Order will be released. Go to the group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’
and select:

156
16.12 ANALYSE COST AND TECHNICAL COMPLETION
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order
The maintenance
Repeat Order
this step for will0020.
activity be released. Go to
The actual thehours
labor groupspent
‘Enterprise Assetis
for testing
select:

16.12 ANALYSE COST AND TECHNICAL COMPLETION

The maintenance Order will be released. Go to the group ‘Enterprise Asset


select:

Give the maintenance order number or find the number by ‘Advanced Sear
usingorEnterprise
Give the maintenance order number Search’by
find the number and‘Advanced
put ??? inSearch
the search field.
for PM «Enter» the order.
Orders
using Enterprise Search’ and put ??? in the search field. «Enter» the order.
At the tab ‘Cost’ in the overview the planned and actual costs are shown. By
At the tab ‘Cost’ in the overview Give
the planned and actualorder
the maintenance costs number
are shown. By choosing
or find the number«Report
Planned/Actual» youbycan
‘Advanced
call up aSear
mo
Planned/Actual» using Enterprise
Drill down you
for more can
Search’ call up a more
and details
related put ??? by detailed
in the search
double report. Drill
field. on
clicking «Enter» the order.
the actual costs.
down for more related details byis double
the sourceclicking on the
document of actual costs.
the actual For
cost instance what is
posting?
the source document of the actual At thecosttabposting?
‘Cost’ in the overview the planned and actual costs are shown. By
Return to the overview of the maintenance order. To finish the order c
Planned/Actual» you can call up a mor
Return to the overview of the maintenance
(technically)» order. To finish the order choose «Complete
Drill down for more related details by. Enter double in the
clicking completion screen
on the actual costs.a
is‘MalfEnd’ [Today’s date]ofand
the select
actual[Current time] followed by «Continue».
(technically)» . Enter in the completion screen at notification for
the source document cost posting?
‘MalfEnd’ [Today’s date] and select [Current time] followed by «Continue».
16.13 to the SETTLEMENT
Return OFmaintenance
overview of the COSTS OF THE MAINTENANCE
order. To finish theORDER
order c
After analyzing the cost of the maintenance
(technically)» . Enterorder andcompletion
in the accepting the resultsat
screen
maintenance order will be settled. Within the group’ Enterprise Asset Mana
‘MalfEnd’ [Today’s date] and select [Current time] followed by «Continue».
16.13 SETTLEMENT OF COSTS OF THE MAINTENANCE ORDER
16.13
After analyzing the cost of the maintenance SETTLEMENT
order OFthe
and accepting COSTS OFthe
results THE MAINTENANCE
balance of the ORDER
maintenance order will be settled. Within
After the group’
analyzing the costEnterprise Asset Management’
of the maintenance select:
order and accepting the results
maintenance order will be settled. Within the group’ Enterprise Asset Mana

146

146

In the ’ Set Controlling Area’ pop up select enter EU00 as Controlling


(Enter)».

Enter at parameters:
Settlement Period [current month]
In theFiscal
’ SetYear
Controlling Area’ popyear]
[current up select enter EU00 as Controlling
(Enter)». 146

Enter at parameters:
Settlement Period [current month]
Fiscal Year [current year]
146
157
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

In the ’ Set Controlling Area’ pop up select enter EU00 as Controlling Area. «Continue
(Enter)».

Enter at parameters:

Settlement Period [current month]

Fiscal Year [current year]

Processing Type Automatic

At processing options

Test Run Select

Check Trans Data Select

Click on «Settlement Rule» to see how the settlement will be posted. Return
to the ‘Actual Settlement: Order’ screen.

Give «Execute» and select «Detail list». The total value is listed to be settled (posted).

Go back to the ‘Actual Settlement: Order’ screen.

Remove the test indicator and press «Execute» and select «Detail list». The sender is the
maintenance order, the receiver the cost center EUPR1000. The financial posting of
the settlement is shown by selecting «Accounting documents». In ‘List of documents in
Accounting’ an Accounting document and Controlling document is created. The posting
is displayed by double clicking on the document number.

With the settlement posting the maintenance order is balanced (posted with credit amount)
and the costs are allocated to the cost center EUPR1000.

16.14 ANALYSE THE COSTS BUSINESS COMPLETION


Go to the group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’
147
and select:

158
With the settlement posting the maintenance order is balanced (posted wi
and the costs are allocated to the cost center EUPR1000.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI 16.14 ANALYSE THE COSTS BUSINESSRepair
COMPLETION
Order

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Go to the group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’ and select:
Maintenance
order

Give the maintenance order number or find the number by ‘Advanced Sear
Give the maintenance order numberusingorEnterprise
find the number
Search’ by
and‘Advanced
put ??? inSearch for PM
the search Orders
field. «Enter» the order.
using Enterprise Search’ and put ??? in the search field. «Enter» the order.
Select «More -> Extras -> Cost report -> Planned/actual comparis
maintenance
Select «More -> Extras -> Cost report order and
-> Planned/actual click againChoose
comparison». «Morethe->maintenance
Extras -> Cost report ->
comparison». In the overview the planned and actual costs are listed. Th
order and click again «More -> Extras -> Cost report -> Planned/actual comparison». In
maintenance order is zero. Drill down by double clicking on the EAM settl
the overview the planned and actual costs
see the areoflisted.
detail The balance
the postings of theofsettlement
the maintenance order paragraph.
in the previous
is zero. Drill down by double clicking on the EAM settlement amount to see the detail of
the postings of the settlement in16.15
the previous DISPLAY
paragraph.
ORDER HISTORY

16.15 DISPLAY ORDER HISTORY


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
With the order history the related orders to the maintenance order can be 147
tracked and
traced. Go to the group ‘Enterprise
WithAsset Management’
the order history theand select:
related orders to the maintenance order can be t
Go to the group ‘Enterprise Asset Management’ and select:

At order status select: Completed and Historical


At order status select: Completed and Historical . Enter
at order your order number. Push the button «Execute».
at order your order number. Push the button «Execute».
All the details of the completed maintenance order are shown. Check the st
All the details of the completed maintenance order are shown. Check the status of the order.
To track and trace the related (purchase) orders and notifications select at th
top of your screen «Document flow».
Select for example the purchase order and with «Display document» th
document is shown. Check the other documents
159
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Repair Order

To track and trace the related (purchase) orders and notifications select at the function bar
on top of your screen «Document flow».

Select for example the purchase order and with «Display document» the purchase order
document is shown. Check the other documents

160
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

17 PRODUCTION ON STOCK AND


FORECAST BASED PLANNING
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance order

17 PRODUCTION ON STOCK AND


In this chapter we are going to change the master data of bicycle that you created in chapter
13 and change the process from make-to-order production of chapter 14 into make to

FORECAST BASED PLANNING


stock-production. For that reason the production planning will be based on a sales forecast.
The sales forecast will use the trend pattern of the weighted moving average of sales of the
past six months.
In this chapter we are going to change the master data of bicycle that you created in chapter
13 and change the process from make-to-order production of chapter 14 into make to stock-
The planning will lead to a periodical increase of stock. With a sales order the logistic related
production. For that reason the production planning will be based on a sa les forecast. The
activities
sales of sales
forecast from
will use thestock
trendwill be carried
pattern out.
of the weighted moving average of sales of the past six
months.

The planning will lead to a periodical increase of stock. With a sales order the logistic related
activities
17.1  of PRODUCTION
sales from stock willON
be carried
STOCK out.AND

17.1 FORECAST
PRODUCTION ONBASED PLANNING
STOCK AND FORECAST BASED PLANNING

Figure
Figure17.1
17.1Production on stock
Production and forecast
on stock based based
and forecast planning
planning

17.2 MASTER DATA CHANGE AND EXTENSION


First we will change the master data of the bicycle from ‘make-to-order planning’ into ‘make-
to-stock planning’. Secondly we extend the master data of the bicycles with ‘forecasting’.

Change the MRP date of the bicycle SB??? by 161


using in group ‘Materials Management’:
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

17.2 MASTER DATA CHANGE AND EXTENSION


First we will change the master data of the bicycle from ‘make-to-order planning’ into ‘make-
to-stock planning’. Secondly we extend the master data of the bicycles with ‘forecasting’.

Change the MRP date of the bicycle SB??? by using in group ‘Materials Management’:
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Enter at ‘Material’ the bicycle SB???. Give «Enter». Select the views MRP3. E
Enter at ‘Material’ the bicycle‘Organizational levels’: Select the view MRP3. Enter for
SB???. Give «Enter».
‘Organizational levels’:
Plant HD00
Stor. Loc. FG00
Plant HD00
Enter
Change at the
‘Material’ thegroup’
‘strategy bicycle
of SB???.
the MRPGive «Enter».
3 view into Select the views MRP3.
10 (Make-to-stock produE
Stor.‘Organizational
master
Loc. data. levels’: FG00

Plantmaster of bicycle
The material HD00
SB??? will be extended with ‘forecasting’ usin
‘Materials Management’:
Change the ‘strategy group’ of the MRP Stor. Loc.into 10 (Make-to-stock
3 view FG00 production). «Save»
the master data. Change the ‘strategy group’ of the MRP 3 view into 10 (Make-to-stock produ
master data.
The material master of bicycle SB??? will be extended with ‘forecasting’ using in group
‘Materials Management’: The material master of bicycle SB??? will be extended with ‘forecasting’ usin
‘Materials Management’:

For material you type SB??? and give «Enter». Confirm the message ‘Materia
product and industry Mechanical Engineering copied from master record’ w

In the ‘Select Views’ you select ‘Forecasting’. Enter for ‘Organizational leve

Forecast
For material youmodel
type SB??? and give G (moving Confirm
«Enter». average) the message ‘Materia
Periodindustry
product and indicatorMechanical Engineering
M copied from master record’ w
Number of periods required
Hist.periods
In the ‘Select 6
Views’ you select ‘Forecasting’. Enter for ‘Organizational level
Forecast periods 6
162
Forecast model G (moving average)
«Save» the data.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

For material you type SB??? and give «Enter». Confirm the message ‘Material type Finished
product and industry Mechanical Engineering copied from master record’ with «Enter».

In the ‘Select Views’ you select ‘Forecasting’. Enter for ‘Organizational levels’ plant HD00.

Forecast model G (moving average)

Period indicator M

Number of periods required

Hist.periods 6

Forecast periods 6

«Save» the data.

Change the master data of the frame FR??? and the wheel WL??? in group ‘Materials
Management’ with: HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Select the view MRP1 and ‘Organizational levels’ plant HD00. Change the
point to MRP
Select the view MRP1 and ‘Organizational type
levels’ ‘PD’HD00.
plant (MRP),Change
was ‘VM’, for both frames
the automatic reorderand wheels. «Sav
point to MRP type ‘PD’ (MRP), was ‘VM’, for both frames and wheels. «Save» your data.
17.3 PRODUCT GROUP
Create a product group for special bike. Use in group ‘Production Planning

17.3 PRODUCT GROUP


Create a product group for special bike. Use in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Via «More», next ‘Product groups’ and ‘Create’.


Product group PG-SB???
163
(second line) Product group Special Bikes ???
Select the view MRP1 and ‘Organizational levels’ plant HD00. Change the
point to MRP type ‘PD’ (MRP), was ‘VM’, for both frames and wheels. «Sav

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI 17.3 PRODUCT GROUP


Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

Create a product group for special bike. Use in group ‘Production Planning

Via «More», next ‘Product groups’ and ‘Create’.


Product group
Via «More», next ‘Product groups’ and ‘Create’. PG-SB???
(second line) Product group Special Bikes ???
Plant HD00
Product group Base PG-SB???
unit PC
(second line) Give «Enter».Product
At the group
member maintenance
Special Bikes ???give:
Member number SB???
Plant HD00
Plant HD00
Base unit Aggr.fact.
PC 1
Proportion 100
«Save» the product group.
Give «Enter». At the member maintenance give:
17.4 DEMAND MANAGEMENT
Withinnumber
Member demand management we enter the settings for the requirements type
SB???
production’ in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:
Plant HD00

Aggr.fact. 1

Proportion 100

«Save» the product group.


153

17.4 DEMAND MANAGEMENT


Within demand management we enter the settings for the requirements type ‘make to stock
production’ in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

164
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

PIR is Planned Independent Requirement. Select for ‘planned individual par


button material and enter material SB???. The plant HD00 must be selected.
PIR is Planned Independent Requirement. Select for ‘planned individual parameters’ the
«user parameters» and «Enter»:
radio button material and enter material SB???. The plant HD00 must be selected. Use the
button «user parameters» and «Enter»: Plant HD00
Requirement type LSF ‘make-to-stock production’
Plant HD00
PIR is Planned Independent Requirement. Select for ‘planned individual pa
With «Continue
button
Requirement type material (Enter)»
LSFand enteryou confirm
material
‘make-to-stock
the The
SB???. requirements
production’
type,must
plant HD00 and be
theselected
setting
back
«userto the launchpad.
parameters» and «Enter»:

With «Continue (Enter)» you confirm Plantrequirements


17.5 FORECAST
the HD00
BASED type,
PLANNING
and the settings are saved.
Requirement type LSF ‘make-to-stock production’
Go back to the launchpad. Create the forecast and activate the sales planning by using in group ‘Produc
Execution’:
With «Continue (Enter)» you confirm the requirements type, and the setting
back to the launchpad.
17.5 FORECAST BASED PLANNING
17.5 FORECAST BASED PLANNING
Create the forecast and activate the sales planning by using in group ‘Production Planning
and Execution’: Create the forecast and activate the sales planning by using in group ‘Produ
Execution’:

Product group PG-SB???


Plant HD00

Select the «Active Version».

Create a forecast with «More», next ‘Edit’, ‘Create Sales Plan’ and ‘Forecast …
Select the ‘Period intervals’ and enter:
Product group PG-SB???
Forecast
Plant HD00this month; to: this month plus 6 months]
[from:
Historic [from: last month minus 5 months; to: last month]
Select the «Active Version».
Make sure that for ‘Forecast execution’ the option of ‘Aut. model selection’
Create a forecast with «More», next ‘Edit’, ‘Create Sales Plan’ and ‘Forecast
Select
On thethe ‘Period
bottom165 of intervals’
this screenand
youenter:
select the button «Historical…» Ignore th
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

Product group PG-SB???

Plant HD00

Select the «Active Version».

Create a forecast with «More», next ‘Edit’, ‘Create Sales Plan’ and ‘Forecast …’.

Select the ‘Period intervals’ and enter:

Forecast [from: this month; to: this month plus 6 months]

Historic [from: last month minus 5 months; to: last month]

Make sure that


HANDS-ON forSAP
WITH ‘Forecast
ERP ANDexecution’
IDES the option of ‘Aut. model selection’ isMaintenance
selected.
order

On the bottom of this screen you select the button «Historical…» Ignore the warning.by
pressing «Continue (Enter)». Enter the given historical data: of table 17.1.

Period Corr.Value

this month -1 2000

this month -2 1900

this month -3 1800

this month -4 1700

this month -5 1600

this month -6 1500

Table 17.1 Historical data

Start the sales forecast with «Forecasting» Select ‘Trend’ and give the ‘Alpha factor’ value ‘1’
and enter for the ‘Beta factor’ correction value ‘0’. Execute the forecast with «Forecasting».

Check the outcome of the forecast. If you accept the forecast use «Copy and save».

166
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

The sales forecast is copied to the first row of the planning table and the selected periods.
The forecast creates a demand for sales from stock per period.

The production planning has to be created in order to meet demand of the forecasted
monthly sales. Use «More», next ‘Edit’, ‘Create Productn Plan’ and ‘Synchronous to sales’.
The planned production is matched with the forecasted sales.

The planning results will be transferred to demand management using «More», next ‘Extras’
and ‘Transfer to Demand Management’.

Answer the question ‘Save planning values first?’ with ‘Yes’.

In the screen ‘Transfer Planning data To Demand management’. At ‘independent requirement


specification’ select LSF (make-to-stock production).

Choose the button «Transfer now» Go back to the launchpad.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES


17.6 PRODUCTION PLANNING
17.6 PRODUCTION PLANNING
Open in an new tab in your browser from the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:
Open in an new tab in your browser from the group ‘Production Planning and

Enter the material number of the bicycle SB??? and plant HD00. Press «C
The
Enter the material number of the individual
bicycle SB???requirements (IndReq)
and plant HD00. Pressfor«Continue
make-to-stock (LSF) are displayed
(Enter)».
The individual requirements (IndReq) for make-to-stock
In the other (LSF) the
tab in your browser are planning
displayed.can be completed with the req
planning. Use from the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:
In the other tab in your browser the planning can be completed with the requirements
planning. Use from the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

167
Enter the material number of the bicycle SB??? and plant HD00. Press «C
The individual requirements (IndReq) for make-to-stock (LSF) are displayed
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning
In the other tab in your browser the planning can be completed with the req
Enter planning.
the material
Usenumber
from theofgroup
the bicycle SB???Planning
‘Production and plant
andHD00. Press «Continu
Execution’:
The individual requirements (IndReq) for make-to-stock (LSF) are displayed.
In the other tab in your browser the planning can be completed with the requirem
planning. Use from the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Material Material SB??? SB???


Plant HD000
Plant HD000
Processing key NETC
Material
Processing key NETCH SB??? H
Plant Create purchase req. HD000 2
Create purchase req. 2
Delivery
Processing key schedules NETC3
Planning mode
Delivery schedules 3 H 1
Create Scheduling
purchase req. 2 1
Planning mode 1
Delivery schedules 3
Planning mode
Scheduling 1 1
Scheduling 1

Press «Enter» and ignore the warning. «Save and Continue» the planning
without stopping’ and «Continue» Check the outcome with selecting the b
Write down the planned order number and the purchase requisitions of thi
Press «Enter» and ignore the warning. «Save and Continue» the planning. Sele
Refresh
without the stock/requirements
stopping’ and «Continue» Checklist in the
the other
outcomebrowser
with tab.
selecting the button
Press «Enter» and ignore the warning.
Write down the«Save and order
planned Continue»
number theandplanning. Select requisitions
the purchase ‘Proceed of this mon
156
without stopping’ and «Continue» Check the outcome with selecting the button «Materials».
Refresh
Write down the planned order the stock/requirements
number and the purchaselistrequisitions
in the other ofbrowser tab.
this month.

156
Refresh the stock/requirements list in the other browser tab.

17.7 CREATE A PURCHASE ORDER FOR THE SUPPLIER


The purchase requisition is created by planning. The purchase requisition will be sourced
and next converted into an purchase order.

168
order

17.7 CREATE A PURCHASE ORDER FOR THE SUPPLIER


HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND The
GBI purchase requisition
Production is created
on Stock by planning.
and Forecast ThePlanning
Based purchase requisition w
next converted into an purchase order.
Choose in the group ‘Materials Management’:
Choose in the group ‘Materials Management’:

Enter in the field Search ‘*???’ to retrieve both your frames and wheels.
Enter in the field Search ‘*???’ to retrieve both your frames and wheels.
Click in the column ‘Assigned Supplier’ on the text ‘1 Sources’ (in case you se
an info record as described in the precious chapter, in case there are more so
Click in the column ‘Assigned Supplier’ on the text ‘1 Sources’ (in case you see no source,
create an info record as describedowninvendor) . Choose
the precious the supplier
chapter, bythere
in case clicking
areon the radio
more button
sources in fron
choose your own vendor). Choose record. Do this for
the supplier both frames
by clicking andradio
on the wheels. The number
button of the supplier sho
in front
for both purchase requisitions.
of the right info record. Do this for both frames and wheels. The number of the supplier
should be visible now for both purchase requisitions.
The next step is to select both sourced purchase requisitions and «Create
for both since they have the same supplier.
The next step is to select both sourced purchase requisitions and «Create Purchase
Order» for both since they haveThe the purchase order type is ‘Standard PO’. «Save» the purchase order and n
same supplier.
order number in the C-Business diagram.
The purchase order type is ‘Standard PO’. «Save»
Go «Back» the purchase
to the screen order
to manage theand note the
purchase purchase and check tha
requisitions
order number in the C-Businessstatus
diagram.
has changed to ‘PO created’. The consequences can be monitored wi
stock/requirement list (change the ‘Material’ to FR??? or WL???).
Go «Back» to the screen to manage the purchase requisitions and check that the processing
17.8 The
status has changed to ‘PO created’. GOODS RECEIPTcan
consequences FROM A SUPPLIER
be monitored with the stock/
requirement list (change the ‘Material’
Post thetogoods
FR???receipt
or WL???).
in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

17.8 GOODS RECEIPT FROM A SUPPLIER


Post the goods receipt in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase Order’. Enter the purchase order n
next on the right of the ‘Purchase order’ field. Give «Enter» to display the p
In case you did not
157 note the15number
7
is can be found with and entering
157

169
status has changed to ‘PO created’. The consequences can be monitored wit
stock/requirement list (change the ‘Material’ to FR??? or WL???).

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI 17.8 GOODS RECEIPT


Production FROM
on Stock andAForecast
SUPPLIERBased Planning

Post the goods receipt in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES order
Maintenance
order

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase Order’. Enter the purchase order n
next on the right of the ‘Purchase order’ field. Give «Enter» to display the p
Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase
In caseOrder’.
you didEnter the the
not note purchase order
number number
is can in the
be found withfield and entering ‘
next on the right of the ‘Purchase order’ field. Give «Enter» to display the purchase order.
157

In case you did not note the number is can be found with and entering ‘*???’ in the
search field. Finally double click the right PO number.

«Close Detail Data» with halfwayWITH


HANDS-ON down onANDthe
SAP ERP IDESleft side in the main screen. Enter

for both lines the Storage Location RM00 (Raw Materials). Select OK for both items, do
field. Finally double click the right PO number.
a «Check» and «Post» the receipt of the goods. Write down the goods receipt number in
the C-Business diagram.
«Close Detail Data» with halfway down on the left side in the main scre
lines the Storage Location RM00 (Raw Materials). Select OK for both items,
«Post» the receipt of the goods. Write down the goods receipt number
diagram.
17.9 TRANSFER ORDER GOODS RECEIPT
TO PERMANENT17.9 STORAGETRANSFER ORDER GOODS RECEIPT TO
PERMANENT STORAGE
The goods have been received in a goods receipt area and must be transported to a
The goods
particular location in the warehouse. The have beenfor
location received
these in
cana goods receipt
be seen area and in
by choosing must be transpor
group ‘Warehouse Management’:location in the warehouse. The location for these can be seen by choosing in
Management’:

Enter a material (the frame FR??? or a wheel WL???). The plant is ‘HD00’.

Selection choose . Press «Execute» and Che


Right-click on the quantity and select ‘WM Stocks’.
The material just arrived and was received in storage type 003 (GR Area Ex

Create in another tab in your browser a transport order for the incoming
170
rack storage in the warehouse using in group ‘Warehouse Management’:
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

Enter a material (the frame FR??? or a wheel WL???). The plant is ‘HD00’. At the Stock
Type Selection choose . Press «Execute» and Check the quantities.
Right-click on the quantity andEnter
selecta ‘WM Stocks’.
material (the frame FR??? or a wheel WL???). The plant is ‘HD00’. A

The material just arrived and wasSelection


receivedchoose
in storage type 003 (GR Area External. Press «Execute» and Che
Receipts).
Right-click on the quantity and select ‘WM Stocks’.
The material just arrived and was received in storage type 003 (GR Area Ex
Create in another tab in your browser a transport order for the incoming goods to the high
rack storage in the warehouse using
Createin ingroup ‘Warehouse
another Management’:
tab in your browser a transport order for the incoming
rack storage in the warehouse using in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

158

Warehouse number 100


Warehouse number 100
Material FR???
Material Plant FR??? HD00
Stor. Location RM00
Plant HD00

Stor.Press «Enter».
Location Select theRM00
transfer requirements you created for the rece
associated with the purchase order. The transfer requirement is converted in
using the «TO in foreground».
Press «Enter». Select the transfer requirements you created for the receipt of the goods
158
associated with the purchase order. The transfer requirement is converted into a transfer
order using the «TO in foreground».

With «Enter» the quantity is transferred to the items. At ‘Items’, indicate that the frames
are to be stored on standard pallets (SUT, Storage unit type) E1. The type is 001 (Shelf
storage), the Sec (Section) is 001 and the ‘Destination bin’ is STBN-1-???. Save the transfer
order with «Posting». Note the number of the transfer order in the C-Business diagram.

Take a look in the other tab at the consequence of this action. If necessary click on

«Refresh». Notice that the five frames are still located in area 003 (GR Area), as a picking
quantity and to be stored in 001 (Shelf Storage).

Confirm the transfer order by choosing in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

171
to be stored on standard pallets (SUT, Storage unit type) E1. The type is 0
the Sec
Take (Section)
a look in the isother
001 tab
and atthe
the‘Destination
consequence bin’
of isthis
STBN-1-???. Save the ct
action. If necessary
«Posting». Notice
«Refresh». Note the thatnumber
the fiveofframes
the transfer order
are still locatedin the C-Business
in area 003 (GRdiagr
A
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA ANDquantity
GBI and to be stored
Production in 001
on Stock and(Shelf Storage).
Forecast Based Planning
Take a look in the other tab at the consequence of this action. If necessary c
«Refresh».
Confirm theNotice
transferthat the by
order five frames in
choosing aregroup
still located in area
‘Warehouse 003 (GR A
Management’:
quantity and to be stored in 001 (Shelf Storage).

Confirm the transfer order by choosing in group ‘Warehouse Management’

Enter the number of the transfer order and the warehouse number 100. Pres
the data
Enter the number of the transfer orderand
andsave
thethe confirmation
warehouse with 100.
number «Posting».
Press «Enter».
Check the data and save the confirmation with «Posting».
Enter the
Check the stock
number of the with:
overview transfer order and the warehouse number 100. Pre
the data and save the confirmation with «Posting».
Check the stock overview with:
Check the stock overview with:

Are both FR??? and WL??? In the high rack storage?

The same procedure must be carried out for the wheels, with the differenc
Aretoboth
are FR??? and
be stored WL??? In
at location the high rack
STBN-2-???. storage?
Note the transfer order in the C-Bu

Thehigh
Are both FR??? and WL??? In the
Did same
you procedure
rack storage?
confirm bothmust be carried
transfer out for the wheels, with the differenc
orders?
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???. Note the transfer order in the C-B
The same procedure must be carried out for the wheels, with the difference that the wheels
Did you confirm both transfer orders?
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???. Note the transfer order in the C-Business diagram.

Did you confirm both transfer orders?

17.10 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER


159
The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Management’:

159

172
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI 17.10 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER
Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Manag

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance order

17.10 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER


The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Management’:

When asked, give as the company code DE00 and «Continue (Enter)».
Enter
When asked, give as the company theDE00
code current
anddate as the invoice
«Continue date and as the posting date. The ‘am
(Enter)».
can be calculated after retrieving the purchase order. Enter the currency EU
Enter the current date as the invoice to thedate and asActivate
amount. the posting date. The
‘Calculate tax’ ‘amount’ including . The
When
tax can beasked, give as after
calculated the company domestic
codethe
retrieving input
DE00 tax).
and
purchase «Continue (Enter)».
order. Enter the currency EUR in the
fieldEnter
next the
to the amount. Select the tab ‘PO Reference’.
current date asActivate ‘Calculate
the invoice date and tax’ . The VAT
as the posting date. The ‘amount’ including tax is
can be calculated after
V1 (19% domestic input tax). retrieving the purchase order. Enter the currency EUR in the field next
to the amount. Activate ‘Calculate tax’ . The VAT is V1 (19%
domestic
Select the tabinput
‘POtax).
Reference’.
Select the tab ‘PO Reference’.

Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, sea
number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections f
Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right su

Enter the purchase order number.and (If


select
you don’ttheknow
number
the POof the purchase
number, searchorder and
for the click on «Copy».)
order
number
Enter in the middle
the purchase of the
order screen with
number. (If the
youentry options.
don’t know In the
the‘Selections
PO number,for thesearch
Purchasing
for the
Press<your
Document’ screen enter at Supplier «Enter» and the
name> and purchase order
click on the rightdetails appear
supplier. on the screen.
«Execute»
order number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections for
and select the number of the purchase order and click on «Copy».)
the Purchasing Document’ screen enter
In the at Supplier
‘Payment’ <yourthename>
tab, enter and
current click
date as on
the the right date’ and 000
‘Baseline
supplier.
Press «Execute»
«Enter» andand select conditions.
the purchase the details
order number Use
of«Simulate»
appearthe to obtain
on purchase
the
160screen.
order an overview
and click onof«Copy».)
the posting.

PressIn«Enter»
the ‘Payment’ enter the Calculate
tab,purchase
and the andasappear
currentdetails
order date write down
on thethe
the ‘Baseline amount
date’ and to be
160 0003
screen. paidpayment
as the to the vendor, taking in
discount
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain of 3%. of the posting.
an overview

In the ‘Payment’
Calculate tab, enter
and write down the
the current
amount date
to be aspaid
theto‘Baseline
thenote date’
vendor, and in
taking 0003 as the
thepayment
«Post» the invoice and the number inaccount cash diagram.
the C-Business
conditions.
discount Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.
of 3%.
17.11 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE
«Post» and
Calculate the invoice and note
write down thethe numbertoinbe
amount thepaid
C-Business
to the diagram.
vendor, taking in account the cash
The outgoing payment by the is bank is done. Post the outgoing payment fr
discount of 3%.
17.11 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S
Bank INVOICE
(ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in
The outgoing payment by the isAccounting’:
bank is done. Post the outgoing payment from the Deutsche
«Post» the invoice and note the number in the C-Business diagram.
Bank (ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in group ‘Financial
Accounting’:

160

160
173
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

17.11 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE


The outgoing payment by the is bank is done. Post the outgoing payment from the
Deutsche Bank (ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in
group ‘Financial Accounting’:
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

The company code is DE00. For Thethe


company
Postingcode
Dateis and
DE00. For the
Journal Posting
Entry DateDate andtoday’s
enter Journal Entry Date
date. The Bank Data G/L account Therequested
Bank Datais G/L account
100000. Therequested is 100000.
amount was writtenThe
downamount
in was written
previous paragraph. Open items selection with Account type ‘Supplier’ and
the previous paragraph. Open items selection with Account type ‘Supplier’ and for Account
enter <your name> and click on the right supplier. With «Show items» the o
ID enter <your name> and click on the right supplier. With «Show items» the open items
supplier are displayed.
for this supplier are displayed.
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
Check the balance at the right top of the screen. It should be zero in green.
Check the balance at the right the
topdiscount. «Simulate»
of the screen. the posting
It should andinwhen
be zero everything
green. looks fine « Post»
Check the
discount. «Simulate» the postingpayment.
and when Make a note of
everything the posting
looks number
fine «Post» in the C-Business
the payment. Make diagram.
a note of the posting number in the C-Business diagram.

17.12 PRODUCTION ORDER


The planned order for this month has to be converted to a production orde
‘Production Planning and Execution’ use:
17.12 PRODUCTION ORDER
The planned order for this month has to be converted to a production order. From the
group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ use:

Enter as material the number of the bicycle SB??? and plant HD00. Press «E

Double click on the planned order (PldOrd) for this month and click «→P
click and select ‘→ Prod.Ord.’.

This brings you into the screen ‘Production order Create: Header’. Check th
174
necessary change the order start and finish date into the current d
17.12 PRODUCTION ORDER
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning
The planned order for this month has to be converted to a production orde
‘Production Planning and Execution’ use:

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance


order

Enter as material the number of the bicycle SB??? and plant HD00. Press «E

Enter as material the number ofDouble


the bicycle SB???
click on theand plantorder
planned HD00. Press «Enter».
(PldOrd) for this month and click «→P
click and select ‘→ Prod.Ord.’.
Double click on the planned order (PldOrd) for this month and click → «→Prod.Ord» or
This brings you into the screen ‘Production order Create: Header’. Check th
right click and select
→ ‘→Prod.Ord.’.
necessary change the order start and finish date into the current da
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance
production scheduled for today, choose atorder ‘Scheduling’ the ‘Type’:
This brings you into the screen ‘Production order Create: Header’. Check the data and where
requirements’.
necessary change the order start and finish date into the current date. To force the production
Check the status of the production order with and go «Back» to the
scheduled for today, choose at ‘Scheduling’ the ‘Type’: ‘Only capacity requirements’.
Carry out the raw materials availability check using «Material». If the raw
available for this order quantity, do not save the production order
Check the status of the production order with and go «Back» to the previous
161 screen.

Carry out the raw materials availability check using «Material». If the raw materials are not
available for this order quantity, do not save the production order and check the stock/
requirements list for these raw materials.

With «Cost order» the cost estimation with quantity structure for the→quantity to be
produced is carried out.
→ Ignore the warnings. The ‘plan costs’ for this order are calculated
and posted.→ This is confirmed with a message in the information bar below in your screen:
‘Costs determined→ see cost display’. Check and analyze the budgeted production costs
with «More» and Goto > Costs > Analysis. Check instead of the variant ‘Analysis’ also the
variants ‘Itemization’ and ‘Cost Component Split’.

«Release Order» and check the status again with .

«Save» the production order, ignore the message ‘Error calculating costs’. «Save» the production
order and note the number of this production order in the C-Business diagram.

Go «Back» to the Stock/Requirements List and «Refresh». The planned order is converted
into a production order.

175
«Release Order» and check the status again with .

«Save» the production order, ignore the message ‘Error calculating costs’. «Save» the
production
HANDS-ON order
WITH SAP and note
S/4HANA ANDthe
GBI number of this production
Production order
on Stock and in the C-Business
Forecast diagram.
Based Planning
Go «Back» to the Stock/Requirements List and «Refresh». The planned order is converted
into a production order.
17.13 ISSUE OF RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION
17.13 and wheels
The HANDS-ON
frames ISSUE
are OF RAW
to be MATERIALS
taken out of the TO PRODUCTION
warehouse and used by production. From
WITH
HANDS-ON WITH SAP
SAP ERP
ERP ANDAND IDES
IDES Maintenance
Maintenance
the group ‘Production
The frames Planning
and wheels are toand Execution’
be taken out ofuse: order
the warehouse and used byorder
production. From
the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ use:

The production order can be retrieved with the Stock/Requirements List in a other tab in your
browser. Press «Enter».
The production order can be retrieved with the Stock/Requirements List in a other tab in
your If there isPress
browser. a message that goods movements are not allowed for this order you must change
«Enter».
the status of the production order. Change the order by selecting it in the Stock/Requirements
List, «Change Element» and release the order (see last paragraph) and save it.
If there is a message that goods movements are not allowed for this order you must change
the status
«Closeof Detail
the production
Data» order. Change
. Enter the order
for both by selecting
raw materials OK it in and
the Stock/Requirements
the storage location (SLoc)
RM00. «Post» the issue of goods and note the document number
List, «Change Element» and release the order (see last paragraph) and save in the C-Business
it. diagram.

«Close Detail Data» . Enter for both raw materials OK and the storage location
17.14 TRANSFER RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION
(SLoc) RM00. «Post» the issue of goods and note the document number in the C-Business
diagram.
Create a transfer order for the goods to be issued from shelf storage using in group ‘Warehouse
Management’:

17.14 TRANSFER RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION


Create a transfer order for the goods to be issued124
from shelf storage using in group
162

‘Warehouse Management’:

176
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Main

Warehouse number 100


Warehouse number 100
Material FR???
Material FR???
Plant HD00
Plant HD00
Press «Enter».number
Warehouse Select the transport100 requirement that you created for goods is
With the
Material «TO in foreground» button the transport requirement is converted
FR???
order.
Plant
Press «Enter». Select the transport requirement that you created forHD00 goods issue to production.
With the «TO in foreground» button At ‘Quantities’
the transportwe can see the five
requirement frames that
is converted must
into be collected and an ope
a transport
order. Press «Enter».
items. The Select the
Storage transport
type searchrequirement
must be 001that you created for goods issue to
With the «TO in foreground» button the transport requirement is converted into a
order.
At ‘Quantities’ we can see the five frames that must be collected and an open quantity of
five items. The Storage typeAtsearch
‘Quantities’
must be we 001
can see the five frames that must be collected and an open qu
items. The Storage type search must be 001
By pressing the «Stock figures» button you see the available stock level. E
quantity in the column ‘selected quantity’. With the button «Stock remova
will see the transport order to be carried out. Check that ‘Confirm’ this trans
that the transfer order is confirmed directly. Confirm the entries with
«Posting»
By pressing thethe transfer
«Stock orderbutton
figures» is done.youNoteseethe
thenumber
availableof stock
the transfer order
level. Enter
diagram.
quantity in the column ‘selected quantity’. With the button «Stock removal fore
By pressing the «Stock figures» button you see the available stock level. Enter the required
will see the transport order to be carried out. Check that ‘Confirm’ this transfer o
quantity in the column ‘selected Repeat
that the the same
quantity’.
transfer order procedure
With the buttonfor
is confirmed the wheels
«Stock removal
directly. WL???.
foreground»
Confirm the entries with «Ente
you will see the transport order to bethe
«Posting» carried out.order
transfer Check that Note
is done. ‘Confirm’ this transfer
the number of theorder
transfer order in th
is set so that the transfer order 17.15 CONFIRMATION OF A PRODUCTION
is confirmed directly. Confirm the entries with «Enter» and
diagram. ORDER
with «Posting» the transfer order Theis production
done. Noteorder the number
completionof the
will transfer order and
be confirmed in thethe actual realize
C-Business diagram. Repeat the same
machine hoursprocedure for the
will be posted. In wheels WL???. Planning and Executio
group ‘Production

Repeat the same procedure17.15


for the wheelsCONFIRMATION
WL???. OF A PRODUCTION ORDER
The production order completion will be confirmed and the actual realized wag
machine hours will be posted. In group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Select «More» and ‘Confirmation’, ‘Enter’, ‘For operation’ and ‘Time Ticket
Enter at ‘Order’ the production order number. Press «Actual Data» to che
177
order data. Choose at ’Confirm.type’ the ‘Final confirmation’. In the secti
163
that the transfer order is confirmed directly. Confirm the entries with «
«Posting» the transfer order is done. Note the number of the transfer order
diagram.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

Repeat the same procedure for the wheels WL???.


17.15 CONFIRMATION OF A PRODUCTION ORDER
17.15 CONFIRMATION OF A PRODUCTION ORDER
The production order completion will be confirmed and the actual realized wage hours and
Thegroup
machine hours will be posted. In production order Planning
‘Production completionandwill be confirmed and the actual realized
Execution’:
machine hours will be posted. In group ‘Production Planning and Execution

Select «More» and ‘Confirmation’, ‘Enter’, ‘For operation’ and ‘Time Ticket’
Enter at ‘Order’ the production order number. Press «Actual Data» to chec
order
Select «More» and ‘Confirmation’, data. Choose
‘Enter’, at ’Confirm.type’
‘For operation’ and ‘Timethe ‘Final confirmation’. In the secti
Ticket’.
163

Enter at ‘Order’ the production order number. Press «Actual Data» to check the production
order data. Choose at ’Confirm.type’ the ‘Final confirmation’. In the section ‘Quantities’ at
Yield you accept the proposed quantity (should be 2100 PC). In the section ‘Activities’ the
actual wage hours and machine hours can be entered. The actual hours are for both cases
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
exceeded by 5 percent in relation to the pre-calculated time. Change the machine time and
the labor time accordingly.
Yield you accept the proposed quantity (should be 2100 PC). In the secti
actual wage hours and machine hours can be entered. The actual hours a
« Save» the confirmation. exceeded by 5 percent in relation to the pre-calculated time. Change the mac
labor time accordingly.
« Save» the confirmation.

17.16 17.16
GOODS RECEIPT FINISHEDGOODS RECEIPT
PRODUCT FINISHED
FROM PRODUCT FROM
PRODUCTION
PRODUCTION
The app for posting the goods receipt is in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:
The app for posting the goods receipt is in group ‘Production Planning and

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Order’. The order is the previously created pro
give «Enter».
At line 1 checkmark OK and enter at Sloc FG00 so the storage location
Goods’.
178
«Check» and «Post» the goods receipt and note the number in the C-Busine
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Order’. The order is the previously created production order
and give «Enter».

At line 1 checkmark OK and enter at Sloc FG00 so the storage location will be ‘Finished
Goods’. Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Order’. The order is the previously created pro
give «Enter».
At line and
«Check» and «Post» the goods receipt 1 checkmark
note the OK
number and enter
in the at Sloc FG00
C-Business so the storage location
diagram.
Goods’.
Monitor the result in the Stock/Requirements list for SB??? in plant HD00.
«Check» and «Post» the goods receipt and note the number in the C-Busine

Monitor the result in the Stock/Requirements list for SB??? in plant HD00.

17.17 SALES FROM STOCK


17.17
Customer Bikeshop <your name> buys 1100SALES FROM
bicycles STOCK
SB??? to be delivered as soon as
Customer Bikeshop <your name> buys 1100 bicycles SB??? to be deli
possible. Use in group ‘Sales and Distribution’:
possible. Use in group ‘Sales and Distribution’:

Enter for the order type ‘OR’ (Standard order) and press «Enter». Enter f
Enter for the
12
64 customer order)
3 order type ‘OR’ (Standard Bikeshop <your«Enter».
and press name>.Enter
The for
‘Cust. Reference’
‘Sold-to party’is ‘MTS???’. Th
customer Bikeshop <your name>. ‘HD00’.
The ‘Cust. Reference’ is ‘MTS???’. The ‘Deliver.Plant’is
‘HD00’. In ‘Item Overview’ you enter the material SB???, the sales order quantity 11
‘First date’ today’s date.
Double click on the line item. Select the tab ‘Shipping’. Enter for the ‘Stor.L
In ‘Item Overview’ you enter the material SB???, the sales order quantity 1100. 164 Also enter
at ‘First date’ today’s date.

Double click on the line item. Select the tab ‘Shipping’. Enter for the ‘Stor.Loc.’ FG00.
Select the tab ‘Schedule lines’. Change the ‘Delivery Date’ into today’s date.

Check the completion of the sales document with «More» , ‘Edit’ and ‘Incompletion Log’.

179
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Select in ‘Item Overview’ the itemthe (10) with the lines’.


tab ‘Schedule data ordered
Change bytheyour customer
‘Delivery Date’and
intocheck
today’s date.
the ‘availability to promise’ Check
situation
HANDS-ON theSAP
with
WITH completion
«More»
ERP AND of the sales document
, ‘Environment’
IDES with «More»
and ‘Availability’. , ‘Edit’ and Maint
Return ‘Incom
order
to the sales order.
Select in ‘Item Overview’ the item (10) with the data ordered by your custom
« Save» the sales order! the ‘availability to promise’ situation with «More» , ‘Environment’ and ‘Ava
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES to the sales order. Maintenance
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES order
Maintenance
order
« Save» the sales order!
17.18 CREATING A DELIVERY TO THE CUSTOMER
17.18 CREATING A DELIVERY TO THE CUSTOMER
Now you have to create the delivery. Choose in group ‘Sales and Distribution’:
Now you have to create the delivery. Choose in group ‘Sales and Distributio

Give in the name of your customer and pre


Give in the name of your customer and press «Enter».
Click on at the end of the row with the sales order you are fulfilling and se
you are to deliver. With «Create Delivery». Confirm the pop up ‘Sales order
Click on at the end of the row Withwith the sales
«Refresh» theorder youofare
number thefulfilling
delivery and select Note
is displayed. the the number o
item you are to deliver. With «Create Delivery».
The «Process Confirm
Flow» showsthe
thepop up ‘Sales
current statusorder
of the– order.
Actuals’.

With «Refresh» the number of 17.19


the delivery is THE DOCUMENT
displayed. FLOW
Note the AROUND
number THE SALES ORDER
of the delivery.
If you want to have an overview of the document flow, choose in group ‘Sa
The «Process Flow» shows the current status of the order.
Distribution’:

17.19 THE DOCUMENT FLOW AROUND THE SALES ORDER


If you want to have an overview of the document flow, choose in group ‘Sales and Distribution’:

The number shows the open orders.

Give in the name of your customer and pre


Click on the blue ‘Overall Status’ of your order. The process with status is d
the overview with «OK».

180
165
The «Process Flow» shows the current status of the order.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance
order
17.19 THE DOCUMENT FLOW AROUND THE SALES ORDER
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning
If you want to have an overview of the document flow, choose in group ‘Sa
Distribution’:
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance
order

The number shows the open orders.

Give in
The number shows the open orders. the name of your customer and pre
Click on the blue ‘Overall Status’ of your order. The process with status is d
Give in the overview with «OK».
the name of your customer and press «Enter».

Click on the blue ‘Overall Status’ of your order. The process with status is display.
165
Return
to the overview with «OK».

Click on at the right of the order row to see the complete order.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

By pressing the «Display document flow» a list of all the actions you have carried out
appears. As you see, all the numbers of the documents in the system are displayed. If you,
for example, have forgotten theClick
number
on of the delivery,
at the right ofyou can find
the order row ittoin
seethis overview.order.
the complete
By pressing the «Display document flow» a list of all the actions you have ca
As you see, all the numbers of the documents in the system are displayed. If
have forgotten the number of the delivery, you can find it in this overview
17.20 PICKING THE DELIVERY
17.20 from thePICKING
The five bicycles have to be picked THE Warehouse
warehouse. DELIVERY 100 is customized
as a ‘lean warehouse’ Order picking is posted,
The five bicycles but
havethe
to storage locations
be picked from theand bins are Warehouse
warehouse. not 100 is c
‘lean ‘Warehouse
registered. To pick choose in group warehouse’ Order picking is posted, but the storage locations and bins
Management’:
To pick choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

With «All Selections» more selections are possible. Remove the Picking Da
Material Data and enter as Material the bike SB???. With «Execute» the deliv
displayed. 166

Select the
181
delivery, choose «TO in Foreground» and give «Enter». Sel
to see the available quantity. At ‘Selected quantity’ you enter the sold qua
To pick choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

With «All Selections» more selections are possible. Remove the Picking Dates. Scroll down
to Material Data and enter as Material the bike SB???. With «Execute» the delivery to be
picked is displayed.

Select the delivery, choose «TO in Foreground» and give «Enter». Select «Stock Figures»
to see the available quantity. At ‘Selected quantity’ you enter the sold quantity bikes to
With «All Selections» more selections are possible. Remove the Picking Da
pick. After «Posting» the picking is doneData
Material andand
the enter
delivery is green.the bike SB???. With «Execute» the deliv
as Material
displayed.
Note the number of the transfer order.
Select the delivery, choose «TO in Foreground» and give «Enter». Sel
to see the available quantity. At ‘Selected quantity’ you enter the sold qua
After «Posting» the picking is done and the delivery is green.
Note the number of the transfer order.
17.21 GOODS ISSUE DELIVERY TO THE CUSTOMER
17.21 GOODS ISSUE DELIVERY TO THE CUSTOMER
To post the goods issue choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:
To post the goods issue choose in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

Give the delivery number (or find by ship to party / customer). After «Cont
you can see on the tab picking that the bicycles have been picked.
Give the delivery number (or find by shiptotothe
Go «Back» party / customer).
precious After
screen and «Continue(Enter)»
«Post goods issue». The status of the
you can see on the tab picking changed.
that the bicycles have been picked.
Check the order process as done in 17.19.
12
643

17.22
Go «Back» to the precious screen and «PostINVOICE THE CUSTOMER
goods issue». The status of the delivery is
changed. Check the order process as done in 17.19. 166

17.22 INVOICE THE CUSTOMER


Create the invoice for the customer by choosing in group ‘Sales and Distribution’:

182
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance
order

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES


HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

Create the invoice for the customer by choosing in group ‘Sales and Distrib

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Create the invoice for the customer by choosing in group ‘Sales and Distrib

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Maintenance


order

The number shows the billing due deliveries.


The number shows the billing due deliveries.
Give in the name of your customer and pre
Give in the name of your customer and press «Enter».
The system indicates the delivery number due to be invoiced. Select th
The number shows the billing due deliveries.
the invoice and «Save» the invoice. Write down the invoice number in the C
The system indicates the delivery number due to be invoiced. Select the delivery. «Create»
the invoice and «Save» the invoice.The invoice
Write downis the
automatically processed
invoice number in thebyC-Business
the systemdiagram.
in the financial account
Give in the name of your customer and pre
The billing document can be shown with:
The invoice is automatically processed
The systembyindicates
the system in the number
the delivery financialdueaccounting and Select
to be invoiced. th
controlling. the invoice and «Save» the invoice. Write down the invoice number in the C
The invoice is automatically processed by the system in the financial accounti
The billing document can be shown with:
The billing document can be shown with:

Type the number of the invoice you just created and stay in this screen (don
With «Accounting» you will see the financial documents. If the journal ent
created, with «Release to Accounting» it will. If there are errors again, check
your invoice.
It willthe
Type be number
displayed
of with «More»you
the invoice andjust
Billing document
created and stay>inIssue
this Output To.
screen (don
RD00.
Type the number of the invoiceWith Use «Printand
«Accounting»
you just created preview»
youstay
willinsee toscreen
thisthe display
financial the
(don’t invoice.
documents. Make
If thesure
press Enter). the invo
journal entr
correct. with
created, Write«Release
down the to amount
Accounting» the customer
it will. If will
therepay
areinerrors
case he willcheck
again, pay
discount
your that is allowed.
invoice.
With «Accounting» you will see the financial documents. If the journal entry has not yet
It will be displayed
been created, with «Release to Accounting» it will. Ifwith
there«More»
are and again,
errors Billing check
documentexport
> Issue Output To.
17.23 INCOMING PAYMENT FROM THEtheCUSTOMER
data in your invoice.
RD00. Use «Printdepartment
The accounting preview» poststothe display the invoice.
incoming paymentMake sure ‘Financia
in group the invoi
correct. Write down the 12
643 amount the customer will pay in case he will pay t
It will be displayed with «More»discount that document
and Billing is allowed.> Issue Output To. The output type
is RD00. Use «Print preview» to display the invoice. Make sure the invoice is complete
17.23 INCOMING PAYMENT FROM THE CUSTOMER
The accounting
166 department posts the incoming payment in group ‘Financia

167
183
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning

and correct. Write down the amount the customer will pay in case he will pay today and
takes the discount that is allowed.

17.23 INCOMING PAYMENT FROM THE CUSTOMER


The accounting department posts the incoming payment in group ‘Financial Accounting’:
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

You can post the receipt of payment of the invoice that has just been create
You can post the receipt of payment of Information
General the invoice that has just been created.
Company Code DE00
General Information Posting Date <Today>
Journal Entry Date <Today>
Journal Entry Type DZ (Customer Payment)
Company Code DE00
Bank Data
Posting Date G/L Account
<Today> 100000
Amount <Amount noted previous paragraph> EUR
Journal Entry Date <Today>
Open Item Selection
Journal Entry Type DZ (Customer Payment)
Account Type/Account ID Find customer by search term <your na
The open items are displayed with «Propose Items».
Bank Data Top right on your screen the balance is displayed.

Choose the right item with . The balance must be zero


G/L Account «Post» the incoming payment and note this last number of document in the C
100000
Leave the transaction with «Post next payment».
Amount <Amount noted previous paragraph> EUR
Look at the document flow as you did in paragraph 17.19.

Open Item Selection


17.24 ANALYSES
The sales took place from stock. Check the consequences by using from the
Planning and Execution’:

184
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Production on Stock and Forecast Based Planning
You can post the receipt of payment of the invoice that has just been create
General Information
Company Code DE00
Account Type/Account ID Posting Date
Find <Today>
customer by search term <your name>
Journal Entry Date <Today>
Journal Entry Type DZ (Customer Payment)
The open items are displayed with
Bank«Propose
Data Items».
G/L Account 100000
Top right on your screen the balance is Amount
displayed. <Amount noted previous paragraph> EUR
Open Item Selection
Choose the right item with . The
Account balance must
Type/Account ID be zero.
Find customer by search term <your na

«Post» the incoming payment andThe note


openthis
items arenumber
last displayed
of with «Propose
document in Items».
the C-Business
Top right
diagram. Leave the transaction with «Poston your
next screen the balance is displayed.
payment».

Choose the right item with . The balance must be zero


Look at the document flow as you did in paragraph 17.19.
«Post» the incoming payment and note this last number of document in the C
Leave the transaction with «Post next payment».

Look at the document flow as you did in paragraph 17.19.


17.24 ANALYSES
17.24 the consequences
The sales took place from stock. Check ANALYSES by using from the group ‘Production
Planning and Execution’: The sales took place from stock. Check the consequences by using from the
Planning and Execution’:

169

Enter the material number of the bicycle and the plant HD00. Press «Enter
Carry
Enter the material number of the out the
bicycle andtracking andHD00.
the plant tracing for this«Enter».
Press chapter according to the instructio

Carry out the tracking and tracing for this chapter according to the instructions
168 of section
14.23.

185
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

18 PRODUCT COSTING
In this chapter the material costing as part of product cost controlling of SAP S/4HANA is
examined.
HANDS-ON The cost
WITH SAP ERP of
ANDgoods
IDES manufactured and the cost of goods sold will be calculated
Product Costing for
the bicycle that was created in chapter 13. The logistical and financial data of the bicycle

18 PRODUCT COSTING
are used in the cost calculations and serve as a basis for stock valuation for the next month.
In the production order the planned costs are activated. In the execution of the production
order actual costs are posted. The confirmation of the order will be done with the use of
In this chapter the material costing as part of product cost controlling of SAP S/4HANA is
time tickets. After the inventory posting of the bicycles, an overhead surcharge is posted
examined. The cost of goods manufactured and the cost of goods sold will be calculated for
and the
a variance analyzes
bicycle that will be
was created in carried out.The
chapter 13. The variances
logistical and will be settled.
financial data of the bicycle are
used in the cost calculations and serve as a basis for stock valuation for the next month. In the
production order the planned costs are activated. In the execution of the production order
actual costs are posted. The confirmation of the order will be done with the use of time tickets.
18.1 After theCOST
inventory
OFposting
GOODS of the MANUFACTURED
bicycles, an overhead surcharge is posted and a variance
analyzes will be carried out. The variances will be settled.
In the product costs calculation costing sheets are used. The costing sheet summarize all
18.1 toCOST
the costs OF GOODS
be calculated MANUFACTURED
into rows, see Figure 18.1. In addition to direct costs the indirect
cost Inaretheapplied
productascosts
material overhead
calculation costing(material
sheets areOH). The costing
used. The direct sheet
costssummarize
are the calculation
all the
basecosts
to which overhead into
to be calculated surcharge is calculated.
rows, see Figure 18.1. In addition
the costing sheetcosts
to direct the the
rawindirect
materials
cost that
are applied as material overhead (material OH). The direct
are being consumed are the calculation base in the costing sheet. costs are the calculation base to
which overhead surcharge is calculated. In the costing sheet the raw materials that are being
consumed are the calculation base in the costing sheet.

Figure 18.1
Figure 18.1Costing sheet
Costing sheet rows
rows

The The
costscosts
of goods
of goodsmanufactured
manufactured can bedetermined
can be determined at row
at row 70, which
70, which is theofresult
is the result of the
the total
totalofofrow
row1010
to to
60.60.

Select the bicycles that have been maintained in chapter 13 in company code DE00. The
calculation is in this case cost estimation with a quantity structure. The quantity structure uses
the bill of material of the bicycle SB???.

186
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Select the bicycles that have been maintained in chapter 13 in company code DE00. The
calculation is in this case cost estimation with a quantity structure. The quantity structure
uses the bill of material of the bicycle SB???.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Calculate the product costs in group ‘Controlling’ with:


Calculate the product costs in group ‘Controlling’ with:

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Product Costi

Material Material SB???


SB???
Plant HD00
Plant HD00
Tab Costing Data:
Costing Variant PPC1 (Standard Cost Est. (Mat.)
Tab Costing Data:
Press «Enter». At the tab ‘Dates’ enter at ‘Costing Date From’ the current dat
are of no interest at this moment. With «Enter» you start the calculation. Th
Costing Variant calculation is PPC1 (Standard
presented. Cost Est.
The costing (Mat.) prices and costs, is shown in
structure,
screen.

Press «Enter». At the tab ‘Dates’Atenter


the tab ‘costing data’
at ‘Costing Dateyou From’ findthe
thecurrent
relevantdate.
costing
Thedata.
otherIn the tab ‘valua
the costing
fields are of no interest at this moment. Withvariant
«Enter»PPC1 you isstart
linked
the to the calculation
calculation. sheet PP-PC1. The tab
The outcome
of the calculation is presented. The costing structure, prices and costs, is shown in based
the manufacturing costs of the bicycle until now are on the value of t
the left
of one bicycle (the costing lot size is 1).
side of the screen.
The overhead costs are to be applied as a percentage surcharge. Start if nece
At the tab ‘costing data’ you find costthe
estimation
relevant like you did
costing data.in chapter
In the tab18.1.‘valuation’
Double click
youinsee
the tab ‘valuation
that the costing variant PPC1 is linked to the calculation sheet PP-PC1. The tab ‘costs’sheets: PP-PC1
PP-PC1 to call up the calculation scheme. Select at costing
asked, for the controlling area EU00. Double click on ‘costing sheet rows’
states that the manufacturing costs of the bicycle until now are based on the value of the
material usage of one bicycle (the thecosting
calculation sheetisis1).
lot size given. Select row 20 : Material OH/Surcharg
the ‘Overhead rate’ in the dialog structure in the left window. A surcharge of
percentage can be selected by using the overhead key, OH Key, SAP1. You
The overhead costs are to be applied as a percentage surcharge. Start if necessary the product
calculation without saving it.
cost estimation like you did in chapter 18.1. Double click in the tab ‘valuation’ on costing
sheet PP-PC1 to call up the calculation scheme. Select at costing sheets: PP-PC1 and
enter, when asked, for the controlling area EU00. Double click on ‘costing sheet rows’. The
structure of the calculation sheet is given. Select row 20 : Material OH/Surcharg.

187
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Double click on the ‘Overhead rate’ in the dialog structure in the left window. A surcharge
of 20% is used. This percentage can be selected by using the overhead key, OH Key, SAP1.
You can leave the cost calculation without saving it.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES


18.2 CHANGE MASTER DATA AND BOM
The surcharge key for overhead 18.2 CHANGE
costs, SAP 1, canMASTER DATA
be allocated AND BOM
through the costing data
The surcharge
of the material master of the bicycle. keycosting
Adjust the for overhead
data incosts, SAP 1, can
the material be allocated
master of through the c
material master of the bicycle. Adjust the costing data in the material maste
the bicycle in group ‘Materials Management’:
group ‘Materials Management’:

Material
Material SB???
SB???

Press «Enter», the material type and industry sector are copied. Confirm this
select the view costing 1.
Press «Enter», the material type and industry sector are copied. Confirm this with «Enter»
and select the view costing 1. At the organization level you enter again:

At the organization level you enter again:


Plant HD00

Choose
Plant costing 1 and select SAP1 for the ‘Overhead Group’ and the ‘Varian
HD00
(Variance Calculation for Orders). «Save» the data.

Adjust the bill of material of the SB??? to make the components relevant to cos
Choose costing 1 and select SAP1 for the Planning
‘Production ‘Overhead
andGroup’ and the ‘Variance Key’ is
Execution’:
000001 (Variance Calculation for Orders). «Save» the data.

Adjust the bill of material of the SB??? to make the components relevant to costing. In
group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Enter at material SB??? and with «Go» the Bill of Material is listed. Click on
188
the line.
Choose costing 1 and select SAP1 for the ‘Overhead Group’ and the ‘Varian
(Variance Calculation for Orders). «Save» the data.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Adjust the bill of material of the SB??? to make the components relevant to cos
‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Enter at material SB??? and withEnter


«Go»atthe
material SB???
Bill of and with
Material «Go» the
is listed. Billonof Material
Click at the is listed. Click on
end
of the line. the line.

With «Edit» you can change the components. Click on at the end
With «Edit» you can change the components. Click on at the end of the first
with FR???.
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES 15
641
Product Costing
line with FR???.

In the tab ‘Status/Long Text’ add X to ‘Relevancy To Costing’ .


15
641
15
641
In the tab ‘Status/Long Text’ add X to ‘Relevancy To Costing’
Make also the second line with WL??? relevant to costing with the same procedure.
154
161
«Save»
the adjusted bill of material.

18.3 COST OF GOODS WITH OVERHEAD


Repeat the cost estimation you carried out before in 18.1. At the tab ‘Dates’ enter at
‘Costing Date From’ the current date. In the tab ‘costs’ you see that the cost estimation
has been extended with the item overhead costs. In the tab ‘valuation’ the overhead key
‘SAP 1’ is added. In the top of the screen with «More -> Costs» you can replace the recent
display version ‘Itemization’ by ‘Display Cost Components’. The costs are presented as cost
components: raw materials and overhead. «Save» the cost estimation. The cost estimation
is activated.

18.4 STOCK VALUATION AT COSTS OF GOODS MANUFACTURED


In chapter 13 the materials are initially valuated. In the material master of the bicycle the
stock valuation of bicycle SB??? was set at € 500. The stock valuation for next month will be
based on the cost estimation of costs of goods manufactured that is derived in chapter 18.3.

189
‘Itemization’ by ‘Display Cost Components’. The costs are presented as cost
materials and overhead. «Save» the cost estimation. The cost estimation is

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI 18.4 STOCK VALUATION AT COSTS OFProduct
GOODS Costing
MANUFACTURED
In chapter 13 the materials are initially valuated. In the material master of the
Price update: mark standard pricevaluation of bicycle SB??? was set at € 500. The stock valuation for next mo
on the cost estimation of costs of goods manufactured that is derived in cha
In material costing the cost estimation of cost of goods manufactured can be transferred to
the material master by using the function ‘price-update’.
Price update: mark standard price
In material costing the cost estimation of cost of goods manufactured can
You are going carry out the price-update and make it effective per the first of next month
the material master by using the function ‘price-update’.
in group ‘Controlling’ with:
You are going carry out the price-update and make it effective per the firs
group ‘Controlling’ with:

Posting Period/Fiscal
Posting Period/Fiscal Year
Year [this month of this year]
[this month of this year]
Company Code DE00
Company Code Plant DE00 HD00
Material SB???
Plant Material

Material
You are now in SB???
‘Price Update: Mark Standard Price’. At the processing opti
‘Test Run’ and ‘With List Output’. Click the button
«Marking Allowance». Click at company code DE00 on ‘legal valuation’ and
variant PPC1. Close this popup window. The costing version is 1. Go one st
You are now in ‘Price Update: Mark Standard
«Execute». ReadPrice’.
the logAtdata
the toprocessing options
check if the tests you
was select
successful.
‘Test Run’ and ‘With List Output’. Click the button
Return with «Back» to the screen ‘Price Update: Mark Standard Price’
«Marking Allowance». Click atprocessing
company options the ‘Test
code DE00 Run’. valuation’
on ‘legal Carry out the
andupdate
checkbythe
pressing «Execut
costing variant PPC1. Close this popup window. The costing version is 1. Go one step back
Check the results of the update in group ‘Materials Management’ through:
and press «Execute». Read the log data to check if the tests was successful.

162
Return with «Back» to the screen ‘Price Update: Mark Standard Price’. Deselect at the
processing options the ‘Test Run’. Carry out the update by pressing «Execute».

Check the results of the update in group ‘Materials Management’ through:

190
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Product Costing
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Material Material SB???


SB???

Choose Accounting 1.
Choose Accounting 1.
Plant HD00
At the tab ‘Future costing run’ you find the ‘Future plnd price’ based on th
Plant HD00
of the cost of goods manufactured that will replace next month the current

Materialrelease standard
Price update: SB???price
At the tab ‘Future costing run’ you
Thefind the ‘Future
valuation that isplnd price’
marked to based onfor
be used thethis
costmonth,
estimation
was established in
of the cost of goods manufacturedChoose
that Accounting
will replace 1.
next month
It has to be released to be used as the current valuation.
valuation for SB???. The valuation is s
target cost. Use in group ‘Controlling’:
Plant HD00
At the tab ‘Future costing run’ you find the ‘Future plnd price’ based on th
Price update: release standard of the cost of goods manufactured that will replace next month the current
price
The valuation that is marked to be used for this month, was established in the previous
Price update: release standard price
step. It has to be released to beThe
usedvaluation
as the valuation for SB???.
that is marked to beThe
usedvaluation is set towas
for this month, be established in
used as a target cost. Use in group ‘Controlling’:
It has to be released to be used as the valuation for SB???. The valuation is s
target cost. Use in group ‘Controlling’:
.

Click on «Release» . The title is now ‘ Price Update: Release Standa


Give:

Click on «Release» Click


. The onis«Release»
title . The
now ‘ Price Update: title isStandard
Release now ‘ Price Update: Release Standa
Price’.
Give:

191
163
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Give:

Posting Period/Fiscal Year [current month of this year]

Company Code DE00

Plant HD00

Material SB???
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Select at processing options ‘ Test Run’ and Posting


‘With Period/Fiscal
List Output’Year. Test with «Execute».
[current month ofThe
this year]
output list should mention 1 material updated. Company Code
If so, DE00
deselect ‘ Test Run’ and «Execute».
Plant
Outcome of the release is that materials are revaluated and cost estimate HD00 with quantity
Material SB???
structure are set as target for this month. The target cost version is a prerequisite in the
system to have the production orders
Selectvariances analyses
at processing (price‘ and
options Testefficiency
Run’ andvariances)
‘With Listbeing
Output’ . Test wit
executed and documented by the system.
output list should mention 1 material updated. If so, deselect ‘ Test Run
Outcome of the release is that materials are revaluated and cost estimate with
are set as target for this month. The target cost version is a prerequisite in t
the production orders variances analyses (price and efficiency variances) be
documented by the system.
18.5 PRODUCTION ORDER USING PRODUCT COSTING
18.5 data
Did you change the material master PRODUCTION ORDER
for SB???, FR??? and USING
WL??? PRODUCT COSTING
according 17.2?
Did you change the material master data for SB???, FR??? and WL??? accord
Start a production order in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:
Start a production order in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Go to «More -> Order -> Create»


Go to «More -> Order -> Create»
Material SB???
Production Plant HD00
Order type PP01

Give «Enter».

Enter at ‘Total Quantity’ 1001 and at ‘Basic Dates’ for ‘‘Start’ today’s date. G
«Enter» and «Cost Order», ignore the message. «Save» the order and write do
order number.

18.6 REQUIREMETNS
192
PLANNING (MRP)
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Material SB???

Production Plant HD00

Order type PP01

Give «Enter».

Enter at ‘Total Quantity’ 1001 and at ‘Basic Dates’ for ‘‘Start’ today’s date. Give

«Enter» and «Cost Order», ignore the message. «Save» the order and write down the
production order number.

18.6 REQUIREMENTS PLANNING (MRP)


Did you change the material master data for SB???, FR??? and WL??? according 17.2? Carry
out the MRP to determine the purchase requirements for this order in group ‘Production
Planning and Execution’: HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Material SB???
Plant HD00
Processing Key NETCH
Create purchase req. 2
Delivery schedules 3
Create MRP List 1
Planning mode 1
Scheduling 1

Also plan unchanged components


Display results before they are saved
Display material list

Give «Enter». Read and confirm the warning with «Enter». The planning resu
de previous created production order. By pressing «Save and contin
components 193
for the bicycle are planned. Choose for «Proceed without stop
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Material SB???

Plant HD00

Processing Key NETCH

Create purchase req. 2

Delivery schedules 3

Create MRP List 1

Planning mode 1

Scheduling 1

 Also plan unchanged components

 Display results before they are saved

 Display material list

Give «Enter». Read and confirm the warning with «Enter». The planning results of SB???
show de previous created production order. By pressing «Save and continue» the required
components for the bicycle are planned. Choose for «Proceed without stopping» and

«Continue». The outcome of the planning can by analyzed by selecting «Materials». Check
if the planning outcome is meeting purchase requirements for FR??? And WL???.

18.7 CREATE A PURCHASE ORDER FOR THE SUPPLIER


The purchase requisition is created by the logistic planning department. The purchase
requisition will be sourced and next converted into an purchase order by the purchase
department.

Choose in the group ‘Materials Management’:

194
18.7 CREATE A PURCHASE ORDER FOR THE SUPPLIER
The purchase requisition is created by the logistic planning departmen
requisition will be sourced and next converted into an purchase order
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND department.
GBI Product Costing

Choose in the group ‘Materials Management’:

Enter in the field Search ‘*???’ and «Go» to retrieve both yourProduct
frames and whe
Costing
HANDS-ON WITHHANDS-ON WITH
SAP ERP AND SAP ERP AND IDES
IDES Product Costing
Click in the column ‘Assigned Supplier’ on the
Enter in the field Search ‘*???’ and «Go» to retrieve both your frames and wheels. text ‘1 Sources’ (in case you see
165

Click in the column ‘Assigned Supplier’ on the text ‘1 Sources’ (in case you see no source,
create an info record as described in the precious chapter). Choose the supplier by check-
marking the radio button in front of the right info record. Do this for both frames and
wheels. The number of the supplier should be visible now for both purchase requisitions.

The next step is to select both sourced purchase requisitions and «Create Purchase Order»
for both since they have the same supplier.

The purchase order type is ‘Standard PO’. «Save» the purchase order and note the purchase
order number in the C-Business diagram.

Go «Back» to the screen to manage the purchase requisitions and check that the processing
status has changed to ‘PO created’. The consequences can be monitored with the stock/
requirement list (change the ‘Material’ to FR??? or WL???), see paragraph 14.5.

18.8 GOODS RECEIPT FROM A SUPPLIER


Post the goods receipt in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

195
status has changed to ‘PO created’. The consequences can be monitored wi
stock/requirement list (change the ‘Material’ to FR??? or WL???), see paragr

18.8
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI
GOODS RECEIPT FROM A SUPPLIER
Product Costing

Post the goods receipt in the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase Order’. Enter the purchase order n
next on the right of the ‘Purchase order’ field.
Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Purchase Order’. Enter the purchase order number in the field
In case you did not note the number, the purchase order can be found with
next on the right of the ‘Purchase
tab order’ field. documents per Supplier’ and enter the number of the ven
‘ Purchasing
the number). «Find» and double click the right PO number.
In case you did not note the number, the purchase order can be found with , choose
Give «Enter» to display the purchase order.
the tab ‘ Purchasing documents per Supplier’ and enter the number of the vender (or search
for the number). «Find» and double click the right PO number.
«Close Detail Data» with halfway down on the left side in the main scre
lines the Storage Location RM00 (Raw Materials). Select OK for both items,
Give «Enter» to display the purchase order.
«Post» the receipt of the goods. Write down the goods receipt number i
diagram.
«Close Detail Data» with halfway down on the left side in the main screen. Enter
18.9RM00 (Raw
for both lines the Storage Location TRANSFER ORDER
Materials). SelectGOODS
OK for RECEIPT TO do
both items,
a «Check» and «Post» the receipt of the goods. PERMANENT
Write down STORAGE
the goods receipt number in
the C-Business diagram.
The goods have been received in a goods receipt area and must be transpor
location in the warehouse. The location for these can be seen by choosing in g
Management’:

18.9 TRANSFER ORDER GOODS RECEIPT


TO PERMANENT STORAGE
The goods have been received in a goods receipt166
area and must be transported to a
particular location in the warehouse. The location
166 for these can be seen by
166 choosing in

group ‘Warehouse Management’:

196
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

HANDS-ON
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES WITH SAP ERP AND IDES Product Costing

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Enter a material (the frame FR??? or a wheel WL???). The plant is ‘HD00’.

Selection choose . Press «Execute» and Che


Enter a material (the frame FR??? or a wheel WL???). The plant is ‘HD00’. At the Stock
Right-click on the quantity and select ‘WM Stocks’ or use «More» and Got
Type Selection choose . Press «Execute» and Check the
> WM Stocks.
quantities. Right-click on the quantity and select
The material ‘WM Stocks’
just(the
arrived wasorreceived
andFR??? use «More» and Goto
in WL???).
storage type >
Enter a material frame or a wheel The 003
plant(GR Area Ex
is ‘HD00’.
Environment > WM Stocks.
Selection
Create in choose
another tab in your browser a transport . Press
order«Execute» and Che
for the incoming
The material just arrived and wasRight-click
rack storage
received inon
in the
the quantity
storage andusing
warehouse
type 003 select
(GR in‘WM
Area Stocks’
group or useManagement’:
‘Warehouse
External «More» and Got
Receipts).
> WM Stocks.
The material just arrived and was received in storage type 003 (GR Area Ex
Create in another tab in your browser a transport order for the incoming goods to the high
rack storage in the warehouse using
Createin ingroup
another‘Warehouse Management’:
tab in your browser a transport order for the incoming
rack storage in the warehouse using in group ‘Warehouse Management’:

Warehouse number 100


Material FR???
Plant HD00
Stor. Location RM00
Warehouse number 100
Warehouse numberSelect the transfer
Press «Enter». 100 requirement created by the receipt of the g
Material FR???
requirement is converted into a transfer order using the «TO in foreground
Material Plant FR??? HD00
Stor. Location
With «Enter» RM00to the items. At ‘Items’, indicate t
the quantity is transferred
Plant HD00
to be stored on standard pallets (SUT, Storage unit type) E1. The type is 0
Stor.Press «Enter».
Location
the Sec Select
(Section) the and
is 001 transfer
RM00 requirement created
the ‘Destination by the receiptSave
bin’ is STBN-1-???. of the
thego
t
requirement is converted into a transfer order using the «TO in foreground
«Posting». Note the number of the transfer order in the C-Business diag

With
Take «Enter»
a look in
Press «Enter». Select the transfer requirement the
thequantity
createdother
by thetabisreceipt
transferred
at the of the to the items.
consequence
goods. of
ThethisAt ‘Items’,
action.
transfer indicate th
If necessary
to be stored on standard pallets (SUT, Storage unit type) E1. The type is 0A
requirement is converted into a «Refresh». Notice
transfer order thatthethe«TO
using fiveinframes are still located in area 003
foreground». (GR
the Sec (Section)
quantity and to beis stored
001 andinthe 001‘Destination bin’ is STBN-1-???. Save the t
(Shelf Storage).
«Posting». Note the number of the transfer order in the C-Business diagr
Confirm the transfer order by choosing in group ‘Warehouse Management’
Take a look in the other tab at the consequence of this action. If necessary c
«Refresh». Notice that the five frames are still located in area 003 (GR A
quantity and 197
to be stored in 001 (Shelf Storage).
167
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

With «Enter» the quantity is transferred to the items. At ‘Items’, indicate that the frames
are to be stored on standard pallets (SUT, Storage unit type) E1. The type is 001 (Shelf
storage), the Sec (Section) is 001 and the ‘Destination bin’ is STBN-1-???. Save the transfer
order with «Posting». Note the number of the transfer order in the C-Business diagram.

Take a look in the other tab at the consequence of this action. If necessary click on

«Refresh». Notice that the five frames are still located in area 003 (GR Area), as a picking
quantity and to be stored in 001 (Shelf Storage).

Confirm the transfer order by choosing in group ‘Warehouse Management’:


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

Enter the number of the transfer order and the warehouse number 100. Pre
the data
Enter the number of the transfer orderand
andsave
the the confirmation
warehouse numberwith100.
«Posting».
Press «Enter».
Check the data and save the confirmation with «Posting».
Enter the
Check number
the stock of the with:
overview transfer order and the warehouse number 100. Pre
the data and save the confirmation with «Posting».
Check the stock overview with:
Check the stock overview with:

The same procedure must be carried out for the wheels, with the differenc
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???. Note the transfer order in the C-Bu

Theboth
Are sameFR???
procedure mustInbethe
and WL??? carried out for
high rack the wheels,
storage? with‘ Display
Check with the differenc
Stock
are toout
The same procedure must be carried be stored
for theatwheels,
location STBN-2-???.
with Notethat
the difference the the
transfer order in the C-B
wheels
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???.
Did you Note the both
confirm transfer order in
transfer the C-Business diagram.
orders?
Are both FR??? and WL??? In the high rack storage? Check with ‘ Display Stoc

Did you confirm


18.10 both transfer
RECEIPT orders? FROM THE SUPPLIER
OF THE INVOICE
The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Manag
18.10 198RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Are both FR??? and WL??? In theThe same


high rackprocedure must be
storage? Check carried
with out for
‘ Display the Overview’.
Stock wheels, with the differen
are to be stored at location STBN-2-???. Note the transfer order in the C-B
Did you confirm both transfer orders?
Are both FR??? and WL??? In the high rack storage? Check with ‘ Display Stoc

Did you confirm both transfer orders?

18.10 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER


18.10 RECEIPT OF THE INVOICE FROM THE SUPPLIER
The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Management’:
The app for posting the receipt of the invoices is in group ‘Materials Manag

When asked, give as the company code DE00 and «Continue (Enter)».
Enter
When asked, give as the company theDE00
code current date
and as the invoice
«Continue date and as the posting date. The amou
(Enter)».
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERPbe calculated
AND IDES after retrieving the purchase order. EnterProduct
the currency EUR
Costing

Enter the current date HANDS-ON theSAP


as the WITH
invoiceamount.
date andActivate
ERP AND ‘Calculate
as the posting
IDES date.tax’
The amount including . TheC
Product
tax can be calculated after retrieving the purchase order. Enter the currency168 EUR in the
field next to the amount. Activate ‘Calculate tax’ . The VAT is
V1 HANDS-ON
(19% domestic input
WITH SAP ERP AND IDES tax). Product Costing

domestic input tax).


Select the tab ‘PO Reference’.
Select the tab ‘PO Reference’.

Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, search for the order
number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections for the Purchasing
Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, search for the
Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right supplier. «Execute»
order number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections for
and select the number of the purchase order and click on «Copy».)
the Purchasing Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right
supplier. «Execute»
Press «Enter» and and the details
select order
the purchase number of the
appear on purchase
the screen.order and click on «Copy».)

In «Enter»
Press the ‘Payment’ tab, purchase
and the enter the current date asappear
order details the ‘Baseline
on the date’ and 0003 as the payment
screen.
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.

Calculate and write down the amount to be paid to the vendor, taking in account the cash
discount of 3%.

«Post» the invoice and note the number in the199C-Business diagram.


Enter the purchase order number. (If you don’t know the PO number, sea
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing
number in the middle of the screen with the entry options. In the ‘Selections f
Document’ screen enter at Supplier <your name> and click on the right su
In the ‘Payment’ tab, enter the current date asthe
and select thenumber
‘Baseline
of date’ and 0003order
the purchase as theand
payment
click on «Copy».)
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.
Press «Enter» and the purchase order details appear on the screen.
Calculate and write down the amount to be paid to the vendor, taking in account the cash
discount of 3%. In the ‘Payment’ tab, enter the current date as the ‘Baseline date’ and 000
conditions. Use «Simulate» to obtain an overview of the posting.
«Post» the invoice and note the number in the C-Business diagram.
Calculate and write down the amount to be paid to the vendor, taking in
discount of 3%.

«Post» the invoice and note the number in the C-Business diagram.
18.11 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE
18.11 PAYMENT OF THE SUPPLIER’S INVOICE
The outgoing payment by the is bank is done. Post the outgoing payment from the
Deutsche Bank (ledger numberThe outgoing
100000) withpayment by the of
a deduction is bank is done.
3% cash Post theUse
discount. outgoing
in payment fr
group ‘Financial Accounting’: Bank (ledger number 100000) with a deduction of 3% cash discount. Use in
Accounting’:

The company code is DE00. For Thethe


company
Postingcode
Dateis and
DE00. For the
Journal Posting
Entry DateDate andtoday’s
enter Journal Entry Date
date. The Bank Data G/L account Therequested
Bank Datais G/L account
100000. The requested is 100000.
amount was writtenThe
downamount
in was written
previous
the previous paragraph. Open items paragraph.
selection Open items
with Account typeselection
‘Supplier’with
andAccount type ‘Supplier’ and
for Account
enter <your name> and click on the right supplier. With «Show items» the o
ID enter <your name> and click on the right supplier. With «Show items» the open items
supplier are displayed.
for this supplier are displayed.
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
Select the open item to be cleared with «Clear >> ».
Check the balance at the right top of the screen. It should be zero in green.
Check the balance at the right the
topdiscount. «Simulate»
of the screen. the posting
It should andinwhen
be zero everything
green. looks fine « Post»
Check the
discount. «Simulate» the posting and when everything looks fine «Post» the payment.
169
Make
a note of the posting number in the C-Business diagram.

200
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

payment. Make a note of the posting number in the C-Business diagram.


18.12 PRODUCTION ORDER RELEASE
18.12
The material availability check will be carried PRODUCTION ORDER RELEASE
out for the production order and the order
will be costed. From the group The material availability
‘Production Planning and check will be carried
Execution’ use: out for the production order a
be costed. From the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ use:

«Enter».
«Enter».
Material SB???
Plant HD00
Material SB???
Double click on the ‘PrdOrd’ and select «Change element». With «Material»
Plant
check is performed and areHD00 the required materials for the order reserved.
The costs of the production order were calculated and budgeted in 18.5. C
the budgeted production costs, with «More -> Goto -> Costs -> Itemizati
At select
Double click on the ‘PrdOrd’ and «Select«Change
lay-out»element».
select ‘1SAP02’. Check instead
With «Material» of the variant ‘Itemization
the availability
‘Analysis’ and ‘Cost component Split’.
check is performed and are the required materials for the order reserved. Return to the ‘Production order Chan

With «Release order» and «Save» the production order is released and can be
The costs of the production order were calculated and budgeted in 18.5. Check and analyze
the budgeted production costs, 18.13
with «More ->ISSUE
Goto OF
-> Costs -> Itemization».
RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION
The frames and wheels are to be taken out of the warehouse and used by pr
At «Select lay-out» select ‘1SAP02’.
theCheck instead of the
group ‘Production variant and
Planning ‘Itemization’
Execution’also the variants
use:
‘Analysis’ and ‘Cost component Split’. Return to the ‘Production order Change: Header’.

With «Release order» and «Save» the production order is released and can be carried out.

18.13 ISSUE OF RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION


The frames and wheels are to be taken out of the warehouse and used by production. From
the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ use:

The production order can be retrieved with the Stock/Requirements List in


browser. Press «Enter».

If there is a message that goods movements are not allowed for this order
the status of the production order. Change the order by selecting it in the Sto
170
201
With «Release order» and «Save» the production order is released and can be carried out.

18.13 ISSUE OF RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION


HANDS-ON
HANDS-ON WITHSAP
WITH SAPS/4HANA
ERP ANDAND
IDESGBI Product
Product Costing
Costing
The frames and wheels are to be taken out of the warehouse and used by production. From
the group ‘Production Planning and Execution’ use:

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

The production order can be retrieved with the Stock/Requirements List in a other tab in your
browser. Press «Enter».
The production order can be retrieved with the Stock/Requirements List in a other tab in
your If there isPress
browser. a message that goods movements are not allowed for this order you must change
«Enter».
the status of the production order. Change the order by selecting it in the Stock/Requirements
170

If there is a message that goods movements are not allowed for this order you must change
the status of the production order. Change the order by selecting it in the Stock/Requirements
List, «Change Element» and release the order (see last paragraph) and save it.

«Close Detail Data» . EnterHANDS-ON


for both
WITHraw materials
SAP ERP AND IDES OK and the storage location
(SLoc) RM00. «Post» the issue of goods and note the document number in the C-Business
diagram. List, «Change Element» and release the order (see last paragraph) and save i

«Close Detail Data» . Enter for both raw materials OK and the stor
RM00. «Post» the issue of goods and note the document number in the C-B

18.14 TRANSFER RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION


18.14 TRANSFER RAW MATERIALS TO PRODUCTION
Create a transfer order for the goods to be issued from shelf storage using in group
‘Warehouse Management’: Create a transfer order for the goods to be issued from shelf storage using in
Management’:

Warehouse number 100


Material FR???
Plant HD00
Stor. Location RM00
202
12
74
1
Press «Enter». Select the transport requirement that you created for goods is
Management’:

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Warehouse number 100

Material FR???

Plant HD00

Stor. Location
Warehouse number RM00 100
Material FR???
Plant HD00
Stor. Location
Press «Enter». Select the transport requirement that you created forRM00
goods issue to production.
With the «TO in foreground» button the transport requirement is converted into a transport
order. Press «Enter». Select the transport requirement that you created for goods issue to
With the «TO in foreground» button the transport requirement is converted into a
order.
At ‘Quantities’ we can see the frames that must be collected and an open quantity. The
Storage type search must beAt001 ‘Quantities’ we can see the frames that must be collected and an open quantity
type search must be 001

By pressing the «Stock figures» button you see the available stock level.
By pressing the «Stock figures» button
(In case you see
no stock the available
is available, checkstock level. according to 14.9. A non-zero qua
the stock
quantity indicates you did not confirm the transfer order in 14.9).
(In case no stock is available,
Entercheck the stockquantity
the required according
in thetocolumn
14.9. A‘selected
non-zero quantity
quantity’. as the button «S
With
Pick quantity indicates youforeground»
did not confirm the see
you will transfer order in 14.9).
the transport order to be carried out. Check that ‘C
transfer order is set so that the transfer order is confirmed directly. Confirm the
Enter the required quantity«Enter»
in theand with «Posting»
column ‘selected the transfer With
quantity’. order isthedone. Note«Stock
button the number of the t
in see
removal foreground» you will the the
C-Business
transportdiagram.
order to be carried out. Check that ‘Confirm’
this transfer order is set so that the transfer order is confirmed directly. Confirm the entries
Repeat the same procedure for the wheels WL???.
with «Enter» and with «Posting» the transfer order is done. Note the number of the transfer
order in the C-Business diagram.
18.15 CONFIRMATION OF A PRODUCTION ORDER

Repeat the same procedureThe production


for the order completion will be confirmed and the actual realized wag
wheels WL???.
124
171

18.15 CONFIRMATION OF A PRODUCTION ORDER


The production order completion will be confirmed and the actual realized wage hours and
machine hours will be posted. In group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:

203
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

machine hours will be posted. In group ‘Production Planning and Execution

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

machine hours will be posted. In group ‘Production Planning and Execution

Select «More» and Confirmation > Enter > For operation > Time Ticket.
Enter at ‘Order’ the production order number. Press «Actual Data» to chec
Select «More» and Confirmation > Enter
order data.>Choose
For operation > Time Ticket.
at ’Confirm.type’ the ‘Final confirmation’. In the secti
Yield put in 1001 PC. In the section ‘Activities’ the actual wage hours and m
Enter at ‘Order’ the production be entered.
order The Press
number. actual«Actual
hours are for to
Data» both cases
check theexceeded by 10 percent in re
production
calculated
order data. Choose at ’Confirm.type’ time. confirmation’. In the section ‘Quantities’ at
the ‘Final
« Save» the confirmation.
Yield put in 1001 PC. In the section ‘Activities’ the actual wage hours and machine hours
can be entered. The actual hoursSelect
are «More»
for bothand Confirmation
cases exceeded by> 10Enter > Forinoperation
percent relation >
to Time Ticket.
18.16 GOODS RECEIPT FINISHED PRODUCT FROM
Enter at ‘Order’ the production order number. Press «Actual Data» to chec
the pre-calculated time.
PRODUCTION
order data. Choose at ’Confirm.type’ the ‘Final confirmation’. In the secti
Yield put in 1001 PC. In the section ‘Activities’ the actual wage hours and m
« Save» the confirmation. The app for posting the goods receipt is in group ‘Production Planning and
be entered. The actual hours are for both cases exceeded by 10 percent in re
calculated time.
« Save» the confirmation.

18.16 18.16
GOODS RECEIPT FINISHEDGOODS RECEIPT
PRODUCT FINISHED
FROM PRODUCT FROM
PRODUCTION
PRODUCTION
The app for posting the goods receipt is in group ‘Production Planning and Execution’:
The app for posting the goods receipt is in group ‘Production Planning and

Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Order’. The order is the previously created pro
give «Enter».
At line 1 checkmark OK and enter at Sloc FG00 so the storage location
Goods’.

«Check» and «Post» the goods receipt and note the number in the C-Busines

Choose ‘Goods
Monitor Receipt’
the result in the and ‘Order’. The orderlist
Stock/Requirements is for
the previously created
SB??? in plant pro
HD00.
give «Enter».
Choose ‘Goods Receipt’ and ‘Order’. The order is the previously created production order
At line 1 checkmark OK and enter at Sloc FG00 so the storage location
and give «Enter». Goods’.

«Check» and «Post» the goods receipt and note the number in the C-Busine

Monitor the result in the Stock/Requirements list for SB??? in plant HD00.

172
204
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

At line 1 checkmark OK and enter at Sloc FG00 so the storage location will be ‘Finished
Goods’.

«Check» and «Post» the goods receipt and note the number in the C-Business diagram.

Monitor the result in the Stock/Requirements list for SB??? in plant HD00.

HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

18.17 PLANNED AND ACTUAL COSTS PRODUCTION ORDER


18.17 PLANNED AND ACTUAL COSTS PRODUCTION ORDER
Analyse the production order in group ‘Controlling’ with:
Analyse the production order in group ‘Controlling’ with:

Enter when requested controlling area ‘EU00’.


Enter when requested controlling area ‘EU00’.
Order [production order]
Time Frame select Cumulated
Order [production order]
«Execute» and «Select Layout…» 1SAP02 ‘Cost Trend’. Push the button
Time Frame select Cumulated
row ‘Confirmations’ you can double clicking (drill-down) on the amount at
plan costs’ and ‘Total actual costs’. The related documents and cost elemen
can be examined. Further analysis is possible by selecting the row an
«Execute» and «Select Layout…»Layout…» 1SAP02
and ‘Cost
furtherTrend’. Push the Target/Actual
select ‘1SAP01 button «Execute». In
- Comparison’. You ca
the row ‘Confirmations’ you canadouble
row. clicking (drill-down) on the amount at the column
169
‘Total plan costs’ and ‘Total actual costs’. The related documents and cost elements are
18.18 analysis ACTUAL
shown and can be examined. Further OVERHEAD
is possible by selecting the row and choose
«Select Layout…» and further select
After‘1SAP01 Target/Actual
the finished - Comparison’.
products are You
stored into the can double
warehouse, the overhead cos
click on a row. the production order in group ‘Controlling’ with:

173

205
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

18.18 ACTUAL OVERHEAD


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES

After the finished products are stored into the warehouse, the overhead costs are settled to
18.17 PLANNED AND ACTUAL COSTS PRODUCTION ORDER
the production order in group ‘Controlling’ with:
Analyse the production order in group ‘Controlling’ with:

Enter when requested controlling area ‘EU00’.


Order [production order]
Order [production order]
Period [current month]
Time Frame select Cumulated
Fiscal Year [current year]
«Execute» and «Select Layout…» 1SAP02 ‘Cost Trend’. Push the button
row ‘Confirmations’ you can double clicking (drill-down) on the amount at
plan ‘Test
At ‘Processing Options’ the option costs’ Run’
and ‘Total
shouldactual costs’. The
be selected. related
Press documents
«Execute». Withand cost elemen
«Next list level» the posting is can be examined.
displayed. Furtherthe
By deselecting analysis is possible
’Test Run’ by selecting
and «Enter» the the row an
actual overhead is posted. CheckLayout…» andoffurther
the posting select overhead’
the ‘actual ‘1SAP01 Target/Actual - Comparison’.
with the report used You c
a row.
in section 18.17.
18.18 ACTUAL OVERHEAD
After the finished products are stored into the warehouse, the overhead cos
HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDES
the production order in group ‘Controlling’ with:
18.19 VARIANCE ANALYSIS PRODUCTION
18.19 VARIANCE ANALYSIS PRODUCTION
The variance analysis and determination of the production order results is executed in group
‘Controlling’ with: The variance analysis and determination of the production order results is e
‘Controlling’ with:

Order [production order]


Period [current month]
Fiscal Year [current year]
At ‘Processing Options’ the option ‘Test Run’ should be selected. Press «Exe
Order [production order]
list level» the posting is displayed. By deselecting the ’Test Run’ and «Enter» th
Period [current month]
is posted. Check the posting of the ‘actual overhead’ with the report used
Fiscal Year [current year]

Select ‘Selected
206 Target Cost Vsns’. The options ‘Test Run’ and ‘Detail list

selected. Give «Execute». The variance is determined by comparison of a


The variance analysis and determination of the production order results is e
‘Controlling’ with:

HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Order [production order]

Period [current month]

Fiscal Year [current year]

Order ‘Test Run’ and


Select ‘Selected Target Cost Vsns’. The options ‘Detailorder]
[production list’ also have to be
Period [current month]
selected. Give «Execute». The variance is determined by comparison of actual costs versus
Fiscal Yearorder the related
target costs. In the placement of the production year] costs are based on
[current plan
the current cost estimation. When the ‘Selected
Select production orderCost
Target quantities
Vsns’. Theare posted
optionsto‘Test
stock,Run’
the and ‘Detail lis
target costs are generated. Targetselected.
costs are Give
determined by the
«Execute». lastvariance
The posted and released costing
is determined by comparison of a
run. In case of partial good receipt of the production order, partial target cost are generated.
target costs. In the placement of the production order the related plan cost
current Categories»
When you press the button «Variance cost estimation. When the
all possible production variances
input/output order quantities
that are posted t
can be determined by the system costs
areare generated.
shown. WithTarget costs are determined
the selection by the lastthe
of «Cost Elements» posted and releas
case of partial good receipt of the production order, partial target cost are
variance per cost element are displayed.
you press the button «Variance Categories» all possible input/output vari
determined by the system are shown. With the selection of «Cost Elements
Carry out the variance analysis by deselecting the ‘Test Run’ and «Execute». The variances
cost element are displayed.
are recorded on the production order.
Carry out the variance analysis by deselecting the ‘Test Run’ and «Execute».

The variances are recorded on the production order.


18.20 SETTLEMENT OF PRODUCTION ORDER
18.20 SETTLEMENT OF PRODUCTION ORDER
The recorded variances of the production order will be settled in group ‘Controlling’ with:
The recorded variances of the production order will be settled in group ‘Co

174

207
HANDS-ON WITH SAP S/4HANA AND GBI Product Costing

Order [production order]

Parameters

Settlement period [current month]

Fiscal Year [current


HANDS-ON WITH SAP ERP AND IDESyear]

Processing type Automatic


Order [production order]
Parameters
Settlement period [current month]
At processing options the ‘Test Run’ and ‘Check Trans. Data’ are marked. If you click on
Fiscal Year [current year]
«Settlement rule» the allocation of the cost settlement is shown. Give «Execute». Select
Processing type Automatic
«Detail List» . Check de settlement. Execute the settlement by deselecting the ‘Test Run’
and give «Execute». Analyse theAtdocuments
processingwith «accounting
options the ‘Testdocuments».
Run’ and ‘Check Trans. Data’ are marked
«Settlement rule» the allocation of the cost settlement is shown. Give «Execu
List» . Check de settlement. Execute the settlement by deselecting the ‘T
«Execute». Analyse the documents with «accounting documents».
18.21 OVERVIEW OF PLANNED AND ACTUAL
18.21 ORDER
COST PRODUCTION OVERVIEW OF PLANNED AND ACTUAL COST
PRODUCTION ORDER
The production orders can be analyzed in group ‘Controlling’ with:
The production orders can be analyzed in group ‘Controlling’ with:

Order [production order]


Order Time frame select Cumulated
[production order]

Time frame select Cumulated


«Execute».

Check if the settlement has been posted correct and complete.


«Execute».

Check if the settlement has been posted correct and complete.

208

You might also like